Samsung DVD-E699 User manual

DVD-E699
DVD Player
User Manual
imagine the possibilities
Thank you for purchasing this Samsung product.
To receive more complete service, please register your product at
www.samsung.com/register
ENGLISH
Precautions
Table of contens
1. Setting up
- Refer to the identification label located on the rear of your player for its proper operating voltage.
- Install your player in a cabinet with adequate ventilation holes. (7~10cm). Do not block ventilation holes on any of the components for air circulation.
- Do not push the disc tray in by hand.
- Do not stack components.
- Be sure to turn all components off before moving the player.
- Before connecting other components to this player, be sure to turn them off.
- Be sure to remove the disc and turn off the player after use, especially if you are not going to use it for a long time.
- The mains plug is used as a disconnect device and shall stay readily operable at any time.
2. For your safety
- This product utilizes a laser. Use of controls or adjustments or performance of
procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
- Do not open covers and do not repair your self. Refer servicing to qualified personal.
3. Caution
2
- Your player is not intended for industrial use but for domestic purposes. Use of this product is for personal use only.
- Apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or splashing and no objects filled with liquids, such as vases, shall be placed on the apparatus.
- Exterior influences such as lightning and static electricity can affect normal operation of this player. If this occurs, turn theplayer off and on again with the POWER button, or disconnect and then reconnect the AC power cord to the AC power outlet. The player will operate normally.
- When condensation forms inside the player due to sharp changes in temperature, the player may not operate correctly. If this occurs, leave the player at room tempera-
ture until the inside of the player becomes dry and operational.
4. Disc
- Do not clean disc using record-cleaning sprays, benzene, thinner, or other volatile solvents that may cause damage to the disc surface.
- Do not touch the disc’s bottom. Hold by the edges or by one edge and the hole in the center.
- Wipe the dirt away gently; never wipe a cloth back and forth over the disc.
5. Environmental info
- The battery used in this product contains chemicals that are harmful to the environment.
- So, dispose the batteries in the proper- manner, according to federal, state, and local regulations.
The product unit accomparied this user manual is
licenced under certain intellectual property rights
of certain third parties. This licence is limited to
private non-commercial use by end-user consumers for licenced contents. No rights are granted
for commercial use. The licence does not cover
any product unit other than this product unit and
the licence does not extend to any unlicenced
product unit or pro-cess conforming to ISO/OUR
11172-3 or ISO/OUR 13818-3 used or sold in
combination with this product unit. The licence
only covers the use of this product unit to encode
and/or decode audio files conforming to the ISO/
OUR 11172-3 or ISO/OUR 13818-3. No rights are
granted under this licence for product features
or functions that do not conform to the ISO/OUR
11172-3 or ISO/OUR 13818-3.
CAUTION: USE OF ANY CONTROLS,
ADJUSTMENTS, OR PROCEDURES OTHER
THAN SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY RESULT IN
HAZARDOUS RADIATION EXPOSURE
Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
6
7
7
7
7
7
Clips Menu for MP3/WMA/JPEG/MPEG4/
CD Audio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Folder Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
MP3/WMA/CD Audio Playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
MPEG4 Playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Playing Media Files using the USB HOST
feature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
CD Ripping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Picture CD Playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Changing Setup Menu
Using the Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Setting Up the Display Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Setting Up the Audio Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Setting Up the System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Setting Up the Language Features. . . . . . . . . . . 11
Setting Up the Security Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Setting Up the General Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Setting Up the Support Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Reference
Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Excellent Sound
Dolby Digital, a technology developed by Dolby
Laboratories, provides crystal clear sound
reproduction.
Screen
Both regular and widescreen(16:9) pictures can
be viewed.
Slow Motion
An important scene can be viewed in slow motion.
Parental Control (DVD)
The parental control allows users to set the
neces-sary level to prohibit children from viewing harmful movies such as those with violence,
adult subject matter, etc.
Various On-Screen Menu
Functions
You can select various languages (Audio/
Subtitle) and screen angles while enjoying
movies.
Progressive Scan
Progressive scanning creates an improved
picture with double the scan lines of a conventional interlaced picture
EZ VIEW (DVD)
Easy View enables picture adjustment to match
your TV’s screen size (16:9 or 4:3).
Digital Photo Viewer (JPEG)
You can view Digital Photos on your TV.
Repeat
You can repeat a song or movie simply by
press-ing the REPEAT button
MP3/WMA
This unit can play discs contain MP3/WMA files.
MPEG4
This unit can play MPEG4 formats within an
avi file.
Setup
General Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tour of the Remote Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connections
Choosing a Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic Functions
Playing a Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Search and Skip Functions . . . . . . . . .
Using the Display Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Disc and Title Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Repeat Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Slow Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Advanced Functions
Adjusting the Aspect Ratio (EZ View). . . . . . . . . .
Selecting the Audio Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting the Subtitle Language. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the Camera Angle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Bookmark Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Zoom Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
6
6
Setup
General Features
CD Ripping
This feature lets you to copy audio files from
disc to USB device into MP3 format. (Only
Audio CD (CD DA)).
CAUTION :
Note
- Discs which cannot be played with this
player.
• DVD-ROM • DVD-RAM
• CD-ROM • CDV
• CDI • CVD
- Ability to play back may depend on recording
conditions.
• DVD-R, +R
• CD-RW
• DVD+RW, -RW (V mode)
- The unit may not play certain CD-R, CD-RW
and DVD-R due to the disc type or recording
conditions.
THIS PRODUCT UTILIZES A LASER. USE
OF CONTROLS OR ADJUSTMENTS OR
PERFORMANCE OF PROCEDURES OTHER
THAN THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY RESULT
IN HAZARDOUS RADIATION EXPOSURE. DO
NOT OPEN COVER AND DO NOT REPAIR
YOURSELF. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED
PERSONNEL.
CLASS 3B VISIBLE AND INVISIBLE LASER
RADIATION WHEN OPEN. AVOID EXPOSURE TO
THE BEAM (IEC 60825-1).
CLASS 1
KLASSE 1
LUOKAN 1
KLASS 1
PRODUCTO
LASER PRODUCT
LASER PRODUKT
LASER LAITE
LASER APPARAT
LÁSER CLASE 1
COPY PROTECTION
Accessories
Many DVD discs are encoded with copy protection. Because of this, you should only connect your DVD player directly to your TV, not to
a VCR. Connecting to a VCR results in a distorted picture from copy protected DVD discs.
- Remote Control
- Manual Book
- Cable Video/Audio
This item incorporates copy protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other
intellectual property rights of ROVI Corporation.
Reverse engineering and disassembly are
prohibited.
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
This Compact Disc player is classified as a
CLASS 1 LASER product. Use of controls,
adjustments or performance of procedures
other than those specified herein may result in
hazardous radiation exposure.
play purchased DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD)
movies. To obtain your registration code, locate
the DivX VOD section in your device setup
menu. Go to vod.divx.com for more information
on how to complete your registration.
“DivX Certified to play DivX video, including
premium content.”
Covered by one or more of the following U.S
patents : 7,295,673; 7,460,668; 7,515,710;
7,519,274.
Description
Front Panel Controls
▼
▼
▼
▼
▼
▼
Disc Markings
~
PAL
PROGRESSIVE SCAN OUTPUTS
(576p)
“CONSUMERS SHOULD NOTE THAT NOT ALL
HIGH DEFINITION TELEVISION SETS ARE FULLY
COMPATIBLE WITH THIS PRODUCT AND MAY
CAUSE ARTIFACTS TO BE DISPLAYED IN THE
PICTURE, IN CASE OF 576 PROGRESSIVE SCAN
PICTURE PROBLEMS, IT IS RECOMMENDED
THAT THE USER SWITCH THE CONNECTION
TO THE ‘STANDARD DEFINITION’ OUTPUT. IF
THERE ARE QUESTIONS REGARDING YOUR TV
SET COMPATIBILITY WITH THIS MODEL 576p
DVD PLAYER, PLEASE CONTACT SAMSUNG’S
CUSTOMER SERVICE CENTER.”
and are used under license.
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO : DivX® is a digital video
format created by DivX, LLC, a subsidiary of
Rovi Corporation.
This is an official DivX Certified® device that
plays DivX video. Visit www.divx.com for more
information and software tools to convert your
files into DivX video.
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND : This DivX
Certified® device must be registered in order to
Play Region Number
PAL broadcast system in U.K,
France, Germany, etc.
Dolby Digital disc
STEREO
STEREO
Stereo disc
DIGITAL
SOUND
Digital Audio disc
1. DISC TRAY
Place the disc here.
2. DISPLAY
Operation indicators are displayed here.
3. OPEN/CLOSE ( )
Press to open and close the disc tray.
4. PLAY/PAUSE ( )
Play or pause the disc.
5.
6.
POWER ON/OFF (
)
Turn on/off and the player is turned on/off.
USB HOST
Connect digital still camera, MP3 player,
memory stick, Card reader other removable storage devices.
MP3 disc
Region Number
Both the DVD player and the discs are coded
by region. These regional codes must match in
order for the disc to play. If the codes do not
match, the disc will not play.
The Region Number for this player is described
on the rear panel of the player.
DivX Certification
DivX®, DivX Certified® and
associated logos are trademarks of Rovi Coorporation or its subsidiaries
3
Connections
Tour of the Remote Control
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
9
1.
2.
10
19
11
20
DVD POWER Button
Turns the power on or off.
REPEAT Button
Allows you to repeat play a title, chapter,
track, or disc.
3. DISC MENU Button
Brings up the Disc menu.
4.
REPEAT A-B Button
Allows you to repeat A-B disc.
5. SEARCH Buttons ( / )
Allows you to search forward/backward
through a disc.
6. STOP Button ( )
To stop the disc
7. SKIP Buttons ( / )
Use to skip the title, chapter or track.
8. MENU Button
Brings up the DVD player’s menu.
9. ENTER/π/†,√/® Buttons
This button functions as a toggle switch.
10. AUDIO Button (√)
Use this button to access various audio
functions on a disc.
11. TOOLS Button
Displays the current disc mode. It also
4
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
lets you access the Display function.
OPEN/CLOSE ( ) Button
To open and close the disc tray.
VIDEO SEL. Button
Changes video output mode.
USB Button
To change device which access to USB
device.
MARKER Button
PLAY Button ( )
Begins disc play.
SUBTITLE(π) Button
Selects the disc subtitle language
RETURN Button
Returns to a previous menu
TITLE MENU Button (®)
Brings up the Title menu.
INFO Button
Used to displays playback info banner.
Choosing a Connection
The following shows examples of connections commonly used to connect the DVD player with a TV
and other components.
Before Connecting the DVD Player
- Always turn off the DVD player, TV, and other components before you connect or disconnect any cables.
- Refer to the user’s manual of the additional components you are connecting for more informa
tion on those particular components.
A.Connecting to a TV (For Video)
1. Using video/audio cables, connect the VIDEO (yellow)/AUDIO (red and white) OUT terminals on
the rear of the DVD player to the VIDEO (yellow)/AUDIO (red and white) IN terminals of TV.
2. Turn on the DVD player and TV.
3. Press the input selector on your TV remote control until the Video signal from the DVD player
appears on the TV screen.
Note
- Noise may be generated if the audio cable is too close to the power cable.
- If you want to connect to an Amplifier, please refer to the Amplifier connection page.
- The number and position of terminals can vary depending on your TV set. Please refer to the user’s
manual of the TV.
- If there is one audio input terminal on the TV, connect it to the [AUDIO OUT][left] (white) terminal of
the DVD player.
B.Connection to a TV (Interlace/Progressive)
1. Using component video cables, connect the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT terminal on the rear of
the DVD player to the COMPONENT IN terminal of TV.
2. Using the audio cables, connect the AUDIO (red and white) OUT terminals on the rear of the
DVD player to the AUDIO (red and white) IN terminals of TV. Turn on the DVD player and TV.
3. Press the input selector on your TV remote control until the Component signal from the DVD
player appears on the TV screen.
4. Set the Video Output to I-SCAN/P-SCAN in the Display Setup menu. You can use the VIDEO
SEL. button to change the Video Output mode.
Note
- What is “Progressive Scan”?
Progressive scan has twice as many scanning lines as the interlace output method has. Progressive
scanning method can provide better and clearer picture quality.
C.Connection to an Audio System (2 Channel Amplifier, Dolby Digital, or MPEG2 )
1. Using the audio cables, connect the AUDIO (red and white) OUT terminals on the rear of the
DVD player to the AUDIO (red and white) IN terminals of the Amplifier. If using a coaxial cable,
connect the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (COAXIAL) terminal on the rear of the DVD player to the
DIGITAL AUDIO IN (COAXIAL) terminal of the Amplifier.
2. Using the video signal cable(s), connect the VIDEO terminals on the rear of the DVD player to
the VIDEO terminals of your TV
3. Turn on the DVD player, TV, and Amplifier.
4. Press the input select button of the Amplifier to select external input in order to hear sound
from the DVD player. Refer to your Amplifier's user manual to set the Amplifier's audio input.
COAXIAL CABLE ◄
2-Channel stereo amplifier or
Dolby digital
C
GREEN
WHITE
RED
RED
YELLOW
VIDEO CABLE ◄
AUDIO CABLE
RED
WHITE
RED
A
RED
Playing a Disc
Before Play
- Turn on your TV and set it to the correct Video Input by pressing TV/VIDEO button on the TV remote control.
- If you connected an external Audio System, turn on your Audio System and set it to the cor
rect Audio Input.
After plugging in the player, the first time you press the DVD POWER button, this screen comes up:
If you want to select a language, press the π/† button, and then press the ENTER button. (This
screen will only appear when you plug in the player for the first time.)If the language for the startup
screen is not set, the settings may change whenever you turn the power on or off. Therefore, make
sure that you select the language you want to use.Once you select a menu language, you can
change it by pressing the ®|| button on the front panel of the unit for more than 5 seconds with no
disc in the unit. Then the SELECT MENU LANGUAGE window appears again where you can reset
your preferred language.
Using the Search and Skip Functions
COMPONENT
◄
CABLE
YELLOW
WHITE
AUDIO CABLE
BLUE
WHITE
RED
Basic functions
BLUE
B
GREEN
During play, you can search quickly through a chapter or track, and use the skip function to jump to the
next selection.
Searching through a Chapter or Track
During play, press the SEARCH (k or K) button on the remote control for more than 1 second.
DVD
CD
VCD
2X, 4X, 8X, 16X, 32X
2X, 4X, 8X, 16X, 32X
4X, 8X
Note
- The speed marked in this function may be different from the
actual playback speed.
- No sound is hearing during search mode (Except CD).
Skipping Tracks
During play, press the SKIP (|k or K|) button.
- When playing a DVD, if you press the SKIP (K|) button, it moves to the next chapter. If you
press the SKIP (|k) button, it moves to the beginning of the chapter. One more press makes it
move to the beginning of the previous chapter.
- When playing a VCD, if you press the SKIP (K|) button, it moves to the next track. If you press
the SKIP (|k) button, it moves to the beginning of the track. One more press makes it move to
the beginning of the previous track.
- If a track exceeds 5 minutes when playing a VCD and you press the K| button, it moves forward 5 minutes. If you press the |k button, it moves to the beginning of the track. One more
press makes it move to the beginning of the previous track.
5
Using the Display Function
When Playing a DVD/VCD/MPEG4
1.
2.
3.
4.
During play, press the TOOLS button on the remote control.
Press the π/† buttons to select the desired item.
Press the √/® buttons to make the desired setup.
To make the screen disappear, press the TOOLS button again.
The Tool Button Display functions are listed in the table below.
To access the desired title when there is more than one in the disc. For example, if there is more
than one movie on a DVD, each movie will be identified.
Most DVD discs are recorded in chapters (similar to tracks on an audio CD). Select this function to
find and play a specific chapter.
Allows playback of the film from a desired time. You must enter the starting time as a reference.
The time search function does not operate on some discs.
Lets you select the soundtrack language for a film. A DVD disc can have up to eight different
soundtracks.
Lets you select the subtitle language or, if you prefer, turn off subtitles. A DVD disc can have up to
32 different sets of subtitles, each in a different language.
EZ
Lets you choose the EZ-View type
Select to activate the Zoom function.
Some DVDs have scenes that have been recorded at multiple angles. Use the Angle function to
view a scene at one of those angles.
2.
Press the REPEAT or π/† button to change playback mode. DVD repeats play by chapter or title.
- Off.
- Title : repeats the title that is playing.
- Chapter : repeats the chapter that is playing.
- Repeat A-B
Using the A-B Repeat function
1.Press the REPEAT A-B button on the remote control.
2.Press the REPEAT A-B button at the point where you want repeat play to start (A).
3.Press the REPEAT A-B button at the point where you want the repeat play to stop (B).
3. To return to normal play, press the REPEAT A-B button until the display shows Repeat : Off.
Note
- A-B REPEAT allows you to set point (B) directly after point (A) has been set.
- Depending on a disc, the Repeat function may not work.
Slow Play
This feature allows you slowly to repeat scenes con-taining sports, dancing, musical instruments
being played etc., so you can study them more closely.
When playing a DVD
1. During play, press the PLAY ( ) button.
2. Press the SEARCH (k/K) button to choose the play speed between 1/2, 1/4, 1/8,1/16 and so
on. If you want to go normal play press PLAY button.
Advanced functions
Adjusting the Aspect Ratio (EZ View)
To play back using aspect ratio (DVD)
1. During play, press the TOOLS button on the remote control.
2. Press the π/† buttons to select
icon. Each time you press the √/® buttons, the screen
size changes. For graphics of the screen sizes and lists of the sequences in which the sizes
change, see the next column.
3. Press the RETURN button to exit EZ View.
EZ
Using the Disc and Title Menu
During the playback of a DVD disc, press the Disc Menu/Title Menu button on the remote
control.
Note
- Depending on a disc, the Disc Menu/Title Menu may not work.
- You can also use the Disc Menu, using the DISC MENU button on the remote control.
- Title Menu will only be displayed if there are at least two titles in the disc.
Repeat Play
Repeat the current track, chapter, title, a chosen section (A-B), or all of the disc.
When playing a DVD/VCD
1. Press the REPEAT button on the remote control. Repeat screen appears.
6
If you are using a 16:9 TV
If you are using a 4:3 TV
For 16:9 aspect ratio discs
- WIDE SCREEN
- SCREEN FIT
- ZOOM FIT
For 16:9 aspect ratio discs
- 4:3 Letter Box
- 4:3 Pan Scan
- SCREEN FIT
- ZOOM FIT
For 4:3 aspect ratio discs
- Normal Wide
- SCREEN FIT
- ZOOM FIT
- Vertical Fit
For 4:3 aspect ratio discs
- Normal Screen
- SCREEN FIT
- ZOOM FIT
Note
This function may behave differently depending on the type of disc.
Selecting the Audio Language
You can select a desired audio language quickly and easily with the AUDIO button.
Using the AUDIO (√) button (DVD/VCD/MPEG4)
1. During play, Press the AUDIO (√) button. Change the audio language by pressing the π/†
button.
- The audio languages are represented by abbreviations.
2. To remove the AUDIO icon, press the RETURN button.
Note
- This function depends on audio languages are encoded on the disc and may not work.
- A DVD disc can contain up to 8 audio languages.
Selecting the Subtitle Language
You can select a desired subtitle quickly and easily with the SUBTITLE (π) button.
Using the SUBTITLE (π) button (DVD/MPEG4)
1. During play, Press the SUBTITLE (π) button.
2. Press the SUBTITLE (π) or π/† button to change the language. Each time you press the
SUBTITLE (π) or π/† button, the language changes.
3. To remove the SUBTITLE icon, press the RETURN button.
Note
- The subtitle languages are represented by abbreviations.
- You have to change the desired subtitle in the Disc Menu, according to discs. Press the DISC MENU
button.
- This function depends on what subtitles are encoded on the disc and may not work on all DVDs.
- A DVD disc can contain up to 32 subtitle languages.
Changing the Camera Angle
Using the Bookmark Function
This feature lets you bookmark sections of a DVD or VCD (Menu Off mode) so you can quickly find
them at a later time.
Using the Bookmark Function (DVD/VCD)
1. During play, press the MARKER button on the remote control.
2. When you reach the scene you want to mark, press the √/® or π/† buttons, and then press
MARKER button. Up to 12 scenes may be marked at a time.
Note
- Depending on a disc, the Bookmark function may not work.
Recalling a Marked Scene
1. During play, press the MARKER button on the remote control.
2. Press the √/® orπ/† buttons to select a marked scene.
3. Press the PLAY ( ) button to skip to the marked scene.
Clearing a Bookmark
1. During play, press the MARKER button on the remote control.
2. Press the √/® orπ/† buttons to select the bookmark number you want to delete.
3. Press the ENTER button to delete a bookmark number.
Using the Zoom Function
Using the Zoom Function
1. During play or pause mode, press the TOOLS buttons on the remote control.
icon, then press the ENTER button.
2. Press the π/† buttons to select
- During DVD play, press ENTER to zoom in 1X/2X/3X/4X Normal in order.
Clips Menu for MP3/WMA/JPEG/MPEG4/CD Audio
CD Audio or discs with MP3/WMA/JPEG/MPEG4 contain individual songs and/or pictures that can
be organized into folders as shown below. They are similar to how you use your computer to put
files into different folders.
To go access these folders and the files in them, follow these steps :
Videos \
When a DVD contains multiple angles of a particular scene, you can use the ANGLE function.
Using the ANGLE function (DVD)
If the disc contains multiple angles, the ANGLE appears on the screen.
1. During play, press the TOOLS button on the remote control.
2. Press the π/† buttons to select
icon. When the angle screen is displayed, press the √/®
buttons on the remote control to select the desired angle option.
1.
2.
3.
1/2
Pages
Open the disc tray. Place the disc on the tray.
Close the tray. The tray closes and the Parent Folder Menu screen
appears (top screen image.) Parent folders contain all the Peer folders that have the same kind of content: music, video, photos, etc.
Press the √/® buttons to select the Parent folder of your choice, and
then press the ENTER. A screen displaying the Peer folders appears. The Peer folders contain
all the folders with the same kind of content (video, music, photos, etc.) that are in the Parent
folder.
CD
Pages
Move
Return
7
Folder Selection
The folder can be selected both in Stop or Play mode.
- To select the Parent Folder
Press the RETURN button to go to parent folder, or press the π/† buttons to select “..” and
press ENTER to go to the parent folder.
- To select the Peer Folder
Press the π/† buttons to select the desired folder, then press ENTER.
- To select the Sub-Folder
Press the π/† buttons to select the desired folder, then press ENTER.
MP3/WMA/CD Audio Playback
1. Open the disc tray. Place the disc on the tray. Close the tray.
2. Press the √/® buttons to select a Music folder, and then press ENTER. Press the π/† buttons
to select a song file, and then press the ENTER to begin playback of the song.
Repeat/Random playback
Press the REPEAT button to change the playback mode. There are four modes, such as Off, Track,
Folder1and Random.
- Off ( ): Normal Playback
1
- Track ( 1 ): Repeats
the current song file.
- Folder ( ): Repeats the song files which have the same extension in the current folder.
1
- Random ( ): Song
files which have the same extension will be played in random order.
To resume normal play, press the REPEAT button until the Repeat : Off.
of The SDMI Foundation). You cannot copy such files.
- Important:
The above recommendations cannot be taken as a guarantee that the DVD player will play MP3 recordings,
or as an assurance of sound quality. You should note that certain technologies and methods for MP3 file
recording on CD-Rs prevent optimal playback of these files on your DVD player (degraded sound quality
and in some cases, inability of the player to read the files).
- This unit can play a maximum of 500 files and 500 folders per disc.
MPEG4 Playback
MPEG4 Play Function
AVI files are used to contain the audio and video data. Only AVI format files with the “.avi” extensions can be played.
1. Open the disc tray. Place the disc on the tray. Close the tray.
2. Press the √/® buttons to select a Videos Menu , then press the ENTER. Press the π/† to
select an avi file (DivX) then press the ENTER.
Repeat and Repeat A-B playback
1. Press the REPEAT button , then press REPEAT or π/† buttons to change playback mode. There are 3 modes, such as Off, Title and Folder.
- Off : No Repeat mode.
- Title : repeats the title that is playing.
- Folder : repeats the AVI files which have the same extension in the current folder.
- Repeat A-B
CD-R MP3/WMA file
When you record MP3 or WMA files on CD-R, please refer to the following.
- Your MP3 or WMA files should be ISO 9660 or JOLIET format.
ISO 9660 format and Joliet MP3 or WMA files are compatible with Microsoft’s DOS and Windows, and with
Apple’s Mac. This format is the most widely used.
- When naming your MP3 or WMA files, do not exceed 8 characters, and enter “.mp3, .wma” as the file extension.
General name format : Title.mp3. or Title.wma. When composing your title, make sure that you use 8 characters or less, have no spaces in the name, and avoid the use of special characters including: (.,/,\,=,+).
- Use a decompression transfer rate of at least 128 Kbps when recording MP3 files.
Sound quality with MP3 files basically depends on the rate of compression/decompression you choose.
Getting CD audio sound requires an analog/digital sampling rate, that is conversion to MP3 format, of at
least 128 Kbps and up to 160 Kbps. However, choosing higher rates, like 192 Kbps or more, only rarely give
better sound quality. Conversely, files with decompression rates below 128 Kbps will not be played properly.
- Use a decompression transfer rate of at least 64Kbps when recording WMA files.
Sound quality with WMA files basically depends on the rate of compression/decompression you choose.
Getting CD audio sound requires an analog/digital sampling rate, that is conversion to WMA format, of
at least 64Kbps and up to 192Kbps. Conversely, files with decompression rates below 64Kbps or over
192Kbps will not be played properly. Sampling rate that can be supported for WMA files is > 30Khz.
- Do not try recording copyright protected MP3 files.
Certain “secured” files are encrypted and code protected to prevent illegal copying. These files are of the
following types: Windows MediaTM (registered trade mark of Microsoft Inc) and SDMITM (registered trade mark
8
Repeat A-B playback
1. Press the REPEAT A-B button on the remote control.
2. Press the REPEAT A-B button at the point where you want repeat play to start (A).
3. Press the REPEAT A-B button at the point where you want the repeat play to stop (B)
- To return to normal play, press the REPEAT A-B button until the display shows Repeat : Off.
MPEG4 Function Description
Function
Description
Skip
(|k or K|)
During play, press the |k or K| button, it moves to next or previous track.
Search
(k or K)
During play, press the SEARCH (k or K) button and press again to search at
a faster speed. Allows you to search at a faster speed in an AVI file. (2X, 4X, 8X,
16X, 32X)
Slow Motion Play
During play, press the PLAY ( ( ) button, and then press the SEARCH (K) button
to view video at a slower speed. (1/2, 1/4, 1/8, 1/16)
ZOOM
X1/X2/X3/X4/Normal in order
- These functions may not work depending on MPEG4 file.
CD-R AVI fileThis
unit can play the following video compression
formats within the AVI file format:
- DivX 3.11 contents
- DivX 4 contents (Based on MPEG-4 Simple
Profile)
- DivX 5 contents (MPEG-4 simple profile plus
additional features such as bi-directional frames.
Qpel and GMC are also supported.)
DVD-RW & DVD+R
Format that support for DivX file :
- Basic DivX format DivX3.11 / 4.12/ 5.x
- DivX Pro
- File format : *.avi, *.div, *.divx.
This unit supports all resolutions up to maximum below.
DivX5
720 x 480 @30fps
720 x 576 @25fps:
Maximum bitrate : 4Mbps
Possible warning messages that may appear
when trying to play DivX/AVI files are :
1. No Authorization
- File with bad registration code.
2. Unsupported Codec
- Files with certain Codec Types, Versions
(ex. MP4, AFS and other proprietary
codecs) are not suppoerted by this player.
3. Unsupported Resolution
- Files containing resolutions higher than the player’s specification are not supported.
Note
• The resolution that can be supported by
DVD-E699 model up to 720 x 480 @30
frames/ 720 x 576 @25 frames.
• This unit supports CD-R/RW written in
MPEG4 in accordance with the “ISO9660
format”.
Playing Media Files Using the USB Host feature
You can enjoy the media files such as pictures, movies andtunes saved in an MP3 player, USB
memory or digital camera in high audio by connecting the storage device to the USB port of the
DVD Player.
Using the USB HOST feature
1. Connect the USB device to the USB port on the front of the unit.
2. The USB Menu screen appears. Press the √/® button to select Menu, then press ENTER.
3. Press the π/† buttons to select a file in the USB device. Press ENTER to Open the file.
Switching Between DVD and USB
If you have a disk in the player, and you are viewing or listening to files on a USB device, or the
USB Menu is on the screen, you can switch from the USB device to the disc by pressing the USB
button on the remote.
Also, you can switch from the disc to the USB device by pressing the USB button on the remote.
“USB loading...” appears on the screen, and then the USB Menu appears.
Note
• Depends on the file size and clip duration, loading time on USB may take longer than using CD or
DVD media.
Safe USB Removal
1. Press the USB button to return to disc mode or the main screen.
2. Press the STOP (■) button
3.Remove the USB cable.
Skip Forward/Back
During playback, press the (|k/K|) button.
• When there is more than one file, when you press the K| button, the next file is selected.
• When there is more than one file, when you press the |k button, the previous file is selected.
Fast playback
To play back the disc at a faster speed, press (k/K) during playback
• Each time you press either button, the playback speed will change as follows : 2X ➞ 4X ➞ 8X
➞ 16X ➞ 32X.
Compatible Devices
1. USB devices that support USB Mass Storage v1.0.(USB devices that operate as a removable disk in Windows (2000 or later) without additional driver installation.)
2. MP3 Player: Flash type MP3 player.
3. Digital camera: Cameras that support USB Mass Storage v1.0.
• Cameras that operate as a removable disk in Windows (2000 or later) without additional driver installation.
4. USB Flash Drive: Devices that support USB2.0 or USB1.1.
• You may experience a difference in playback quality when you connect a USB1.1 device.
5. USB card Reader: One slot USB card reader and Multi slot USB card reader
• Depending on the manufacturer. the USB card reader may not be supported.
• If you install multiple memory devices into a multi card reader, you may experience problems.
6. If you use a USB extension cable, the USB device might not be recognized.
Note
• CBI (Control/Bulk/Interrupt) is not supported.
• Digital Cameras that use PTP protocol or require additional program installation when connected to
a PC are not supported.
• A device using NTFS file system is not supported. (Only FAT 16/32 (File Allocation Table 16/32) file
system is supported.)
• Some MP3 players, when connected to this product,may not operate depending on the sector size
of their file system.
• The USB HOST function is not supported if a product that transfers media files by its manufacturerspecific program is connected.
• Does not operate with Janus enabled MTP(Media Transfer Protocol) devices.
• The USB host function of this product does not support all USB devices.
• The USB Host does not support USB Hard Disc Drives (HDD).
CD Ripping
This feature allows you to copy audio files from a disc to a USB device in MP3 format.
Open the dics tray. Place the Audio CD(CD DA) disc on the tray, and close the tray. Connect the
USB device to the USB port on the front of the unit. Press the USB button.
1.
2.
3.
Press the TOOLS button to display the Ripping screen.
Press the π/† buttons, then press the ENTER button to select files for ripping.
- To deselect files, press ENTER button again.
Press the √ and † button to select START, then press the ENTER button begin ripping.
The Ripping menu contain the following buttons :
9
- Mode (Fast/Normal)
- Bitrate, press ENTER to change : 128kbps ➞ 192kbps ➞ 128kbps.
- Device selection, press ENTER to change between partitions on the USB device (max 4).
- Select - Unselect, press ENTER to change from Select all (files) or Select none.
Note
-To cancel copying in progress, press the ENTER button.
-To return to the CDDA screen, press the TOOLS button again.
-While the CD is being ripped, the player will automatically enter stop mode.
-The ripping process is 2.6 times of normal speed.
-The DVD player can only rip Audio CD (CD DA) discs.
-The USB button does not work while you’re in the Ripping menu.
-CD ripping function may not supported for some MP3 players device.
Picture CD Playback
1. Select the desired folder.
2. Press the π/† buttons to select a Picture file in the clips menu and then press the ENTER button.
Note
- Press the STOP button to return to the clips menu.
- When playing a Kodak Picture CD, the unit displays the Photo directly, not the clips menu.
Rotation
- Press the TOOLS button to select Rotate, and then press the ENTER button.
- Each time the √/® buttons are pressed, the picture rotates 90 degrees clockwise.
- Each time the π button is pressed, the picture will reverse to the upside down to show a mirror
image.
- Each time the † button is pressed, the picture will reverse to the right side to show a mirror
image.
Zoom
- Press the TOOLS button to select Zoom, and then press the ENTER button.
- Each time ENTER button is pressed, the picture is enlarged. Zoom mode : X1-X2-X3-X4-X1.
- Press the √/®/π/† buttons to move the enlarged picture so you can view different portions.
Slide Show
- When youpress the PLAY at JPEG file, it will go to full screen mode and automatically slide
show.
Note
- Depending on a file size, the amount of time between each picture may be different from the manual.
- If you don’t press any button, the slide show will start automatically in about 10 seconds by default.
10
CD-R JPEG Disc
- Only files with the “.jpg” and “.JPG” extensions can be played.
- If the disc is not closed, it will take longer to start playing and not all of the recorded files may be
played.
- Only CD-R discs with JPEG files in ISO 9660 or Joliet format can be played.
- The name of the JPEG file may not be longer than 8 characters and should contain no blank spaces
or special characters (. / = +).
- Only a consecutively written multi-session disc can be played. If there is a blank segment in the multisession disc, the disc can be played only up to the blank segment.
- A maximum of 500 images can be stored on a single CD.
- Kodak Picture CDs are recommended.
- When playing a Kodak Picture CD, only the JPEG files in the pictures folder can be played.
- Kodak Picture CD: The JPEG files in the pictures folder can be played automatically.
- Konica Picture CD: If you want to see the Picture, select the JPEG files in the clips menu.
- Fuji Picture CD: If you want to see the Picture, select the JPEG files in the clips menu.
- QSS Picture CD: The unit may not play QSS Picture CD.
- If the number of files in 1 Disc is over 500, only 500 JPEG files can be played.
- If the number of folders in 1 Disc is over 500, only JPEG files in 500 folders can be played.
Changing setup menu
Using the Setup Menu
The Setup menu lets you customize your DVD player by allowing you to select various language
preferences, set up a parental level, even adjust the player to the type of television screen you
have.
1. With the unit in Stop mode, press the MENU button on the remote control. Press the √/® buttons to select SettingS, then press the ENTER button.
2. Press the π/† buttons to select a Setup Menu, then press the ® or ENTER to bring up the
sub-menu.
3. Press the π/† buttons to select a sub-menu option, then press the ® or ENTER.
4. To make the setup screen disappear after setting up, press the RETURN button.
Setting Up the Display Options
Display options enable you to set various video functions of the player.
1. With the unit in Stop mode, press the MENU button. Press the √/® buttons to select
SettingS, then press the ENTER button.
2. Press the π/† buttons to select DIsplay, then press the ® or ENTER button.
3. Press the π/† buttons to select the desired item, then press the ® or ENTER button.
Note
• Consult your TV User’s Manual to find out if your TV supports Progressive Scan. If
Progressive Scan is supported, follow the TV User’s Manual regarding Progressive Scan settings in the TV’s menu system.
• If Video Output is set incorrectly, the screen may be blocked.
• When the resolution is changed during playback, it may take a few seconds for a normal
image to appear.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
Setting Up the System Options
1. With the unit in Stop mode, press the MENU button. Press the √/® buttons to select
SettingS, then press the ENTER button.
2. Press the π/† buttons to select System, then press the ® or ENTER button.
3. Press the π/† buttons to select the desired item, then press the ® or ENTER button.
Setting Up the Language Features
If you set the player menu, disc menu, audio and subtitle language in advance, they will come up
automatically every time you watch a movie.
1. With the unit in Stop mode, press the MENU button. Press the √/® buttons to select
SettingS, then press the ENTER button.
2. Press the π/† buttons to select Language, then press the ® or ENTER button.
3. Press the π/† buttons to select the desired language, then press the ® or ENTER button.
Note
-The language is selected and the screen returns to Language Setup menu.
-To make the setup menu disappear, press the MENU button.
-If the selected language is not recorded on the disc, the original pre-recorded language is selected.
-Select “Original” if you want the defaultsoundtrack language to be the original language the disc is
recorded in.
-Select “Automatic” if you want the subtitle language to be the same as the language selected as the
audio language.
-Some discs may not contain the language you select as your initial language; in that case the disc will use
its original language setting.
Setting Up the Audio Options
Audio Options allows you to setup the audio device and sound status settings depending on the
audio system in use.
1. With the unit in Stop mode, press the MENU button. Press the √/® buttons to select
Setting, then press the ENTER button.
2. Press the π/† buttons to select Audio, then press the ® or ENTER button.
3. Press the π/† buttons to select the desired item, then press the ® or ENTER button.
Note :
-When play a disc that has MPEG Audio and you have Bitstream selected in the Audio Options menu,
the Digital Audio jack may not output audio
-There is no analogue audio output when you play a sound disc.
-Even when PCM Down sampling is Off
•Some discs will only output down sampled audio through the digital outputs.
Setting Up the Security Options
The Parental Control function works in conjunction with DVDs that have been assigned a rating,
which helps you control the types of DVDs that your family watches. There are up to 8 rating levels
on a disc.
Setting Up the Rating Level
1. With the unit in Stop mode, press the MENU button. Press the √/® buttons to select
SETTINGS, and then press the ENTER button.
2. Press the π/† buttons to select SECURITY, and then press the ® or ENTER button.
3. The first time you access security, you must enter the default password: 0000. To enter the
default password, highlight 0 on the screen and press the ENTER button 4 times. To change
the default password.
4. Press the π/† buttons to select PARENTAL, and then press the ® or ENTER button.
5. Press the π/† buttons to select the rating level you want, and then press the ENTER button.
11
The higher the rating level, the more mature the allowable content.
- If you select the Kid Safe level, discs rated level 2 or higher will not play unless you enter the
password.
Security Levels :
❶ KID SAFE
❷ G (General Audiences) : All Ages Admitted
❸ PG (Parental Guidance suggested) : Some material may not be suitable for young children.
❹ PG 13 (PG-13 Parents strongly cautioned) : Some material may be inapproriate for children under
13.
❺ PGR (Parental Guidance Recommended) : These are not necessarily unsuitable for children, but
viewer discretion is advised, and parents and guardians are encouraged to supervise younger viewers.
❻ R (Restricted) : Under 17 requires accompanying adult
❼ NC17 (NC-17) : No one 17 and under admitted.
❽ ADULT
Note:
- If you have forgotten your password, see “Forgot Password” in the Troubleshooting Guide.
Changing the Password
To change the password, follow these steps:
1. On the Settings Menu, Select Security, and then press the ENTER button.
2. Enter the current 4 digit password. If you have never changed the password, enter the default
password: 0000. To enter a number, use the √/®/π/† buttons to highlight a number, and then
press the ENTER button.
3. Select Change Password, and then press the ENTER button.
4. Enter the new 4 digit password. Use the √/®/π/† buttons to select a number, and then press
the ENTER button. Repeat 4 times.
5. Re-enter the new password in the same manner to confirm. The Security menu re-appears.
Setting Up the General Options
1. With the unit in Stop mode, press the MENU button. Press the √/® buttons to select
SettingS, then press the ENTER button.
2. Press the π/† buttons to select General, then press the ® or ENTER button.
3. Press the π/† buttons to select the desired item, then press the ® or ENTER button.
Setting Up the Support Options
Support option enable you to check your DVD player information such as the model code,
Software Version, The serial and version numbers can be found on the back side of your DVDPlayer.
1. With the unit in Stop mode, press the MENU button. Press the √/® buttons to select
SETTINGS, then press the ENTER button.
2. Press the π/† buttons to select SUPPORT, then press the ® or ENTER button.
3. Select PRODUCT INFORMATION, then press the ® or ENTER button.
12
Reference
Troubleshooting
Before requesting service (troubleshooting), please check the following.
Problem
Action
The screen is blocked.
• Press the ®|| button (in front panel) for more than 5 seconds under no
disc inside. All setting will revert to factory settings.
Forgot password.
• Press the ®|| button (in front panel) for more than 5 seconds under no
disc inside. All setings including the password will revert to the factory
settings. Don't use this unless absolutely necessary.
Spesifications
General
Power Requirements
AC110~240V, 50/60Hz
Power Comsumption
For the power supply and power consumption, refer to the label attached
to the product
Weight
Dimensions
300mm(W) X 208mm(D) X 42mm(H)
Operating Temperature Range
+5ºC to +35ºC
Operating Humidity Range
10 % to 75 %
Composite Video
1 channel : 1.0 Vp-p (75 Ω load)
Component Video
Y : 1.0 Vp-p (75 Ω load)
Pr : 0.70 Vp-p (75 Ω load)
Pb : 0.70 Vp-p (75 Ω load)
Video Output
Audio Output
1.10 Kg
Output terminal
2 CH
Maximum Output Level
2Vrms
Frequency Response
Digital Audio Out
20 Hz to 20 kHz
Coaxial terminal (S/PDIF)
13
Memo
Memo
Contact SAMSUNG WORLD WIDE
If you have any questions or comments relating to Samsung products, please contact the SAMSUNG customer care centre.
Area
` Asia Pacific
AUSTRALIA
NEW ZEALAND
CHINA
HONG KONG
INDIA
INDONESIA
MALAYSIA
PHILIPPINES
SINGAPORE
THAILAND
TAIWAN
VIETNAM
Contact Centre 
1300 362 603
0800 SAMSUNG (0800 726 786)
400-810-5858
(852) 3698 4698
1800 1100 11
3030 8282
1800 3000 8282
1800 266 8282
0800-112-8888
021-5699-7777
1800-88-9999
1-800-10-SAMSUNG(726-7864) for PLDT
1-800-3-SAMSUNG(726-7864) for Digitel
1-800-8-SAMSUNG(726-7864) for Globe
02-5805777
1800-SAMSUNG(726-7864)
1800-29-3232
02-689-3232
0800-329-999
0266-026-066
1 800 588 889
Web Site
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com/hk
www.samsung.com/hk_en/
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
Area
` Middle East
U.A.E
OMAN
KUWAIT
BAHRAIN
Egypt
JORDAN
IRAN
Morocco
Saudi Arabia
` Africa
NIGERIA
Ghana
Cote D’ Ivoire
Senegal
Cameroon
KENYA
UGANDA
TANZANIA
SOUTH AFRICA
Contact Centre 
Web Site
800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
183-2255
8000-4726
08000-726786
800-22273
021-8255
080 100 2255
9200-21230
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
0800-726-7864
0800-10077
0302-200077
8000 0077
800-00-0077
7095- 0077
0800 724 000
0800 300 300
0685 88 99 00
0860-SAMSUNG(726-7864 )
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
‫‪DVD-E699‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه دى وى دى‬
‫ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎﻱ ﻜﺎﺭﺒﺭ‬
‫ﺴﺎ ﻤﺳﻭﻨگ‬
‫ﻔﻗﻁ ﺒﺎ ﺼﻣﺎﻨﺕ ﺴﺎﻡ ﺴﺭﻭﻴﺲ‬
‫‪www.samservice.com‬‬
‫ﺴﺭﻭﻴﺱ‬
‫‪AK68-02208A-00‬‬
‫‪AK68-02212A‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﺻﺖ ﻫﺎ را ﲡﺴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺒﺎﺒﺕ ﺨﺭﻴﺩ ﺍﻴﻥ ﻤﺣﺻﻭﻝ ‪ Samsung‬ﺍﺯ ﺸﻣﺎ ﻤﺗﺷﻛﺭﻴﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺒﺭﺍﻱ ﺩﺭﻴﺎﻔﺕ ﺨﺩ ﻤﺎﺘﻲ ﺠﺎﻤﻊ ﺘﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﻟﻄﻔًﺎ ﻤﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﺨﻭﺩ ﺭﺍﺩﺭ ﻨﺷﺎﻨﻲ ﺍﻴﻧﺗﺭﻨﺗﻲ ﺯﻴﺭ ﺜﺑﺕ ﻜﻧﻳﺩ‬
‫‪ww.samsung.com/register‬‬
‫ﻓﺎر ﺳﻰ‬
‫اﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻬﺎ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺒﺭﭘﺎ ﺴﺎﺧﺘﻦ‬
‫‬‫‪-‬‬
‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺕ ﻮﻠﺘﺎژ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺘﻰ ﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺒﻪ ﺒﺭﭽﺴﺏ ﺸﻧﺎﺴﺎﻴﻰ ﻜﻪ ﺪﺭ ﭙﺸﺕ‬
‫ﭙﺧﺶ ﻜﻨﻧﺪﻩ ﻘﺭﺍﺭ ﮔﺭ ﻔﺘﻪ ﺍﺴﺕ ﻣﺭﺍﺠﻌﻪ ﻜﻧﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭙﺧﺶ ﻜﻨﻧﺩﻩ ﺭﺍﺩﺭ ﻘﻔﺳﻪ ﺍﻯ ﻘﺭﺍﺭ ﺪﻫﻳﺪ ﻜﻪ ﺪﺍﺭﺍﻯ ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺧﻬﺎﻯ ﺘﻬﻮﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻤﻨﺎﺴﺏ ﺒﺎﺸﺪ‪ ٧) .‬ﺘﺎ ‪ ١٠‬ﺴﺎﻨﺘﻴﻣﺘﺭ( ﺴﻮﺭﺍﺧﻬﺎﻯ ﺘﻬﻮﻴﻪ ﺪﺭ ﻫﻴﭽﻜﺩﺍﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﺠﺰﺍﺀ ﺭﺍ ﺒﺭﺍﻱ ﮔﺭﺪﺶ ﻫﻮﺍ ﻤﺴﺪﻮﺪ ﻨﻜﻨﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻴﺳﮏ ﺭﺍ ﺒﺎ ﺩﺴﺕ ﺪﺭ ﺴﻴﻧﻰ ﺪﻴﺳﮏ ﻔﺷﺎﺭ ﻨﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺠﺯﺍﺀ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻮﻯ ﻴﻛﺪ ﻴﻛﺭ ﻘﺭﺍﺭ ﻨﺪﻫﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﻘﺒﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺎﺒﺠﺎ ﻛﺭﺪﻦ ﭘﺧﺶ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻧﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻤﻄﻣﺋﻦ ﺸﻮﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﻰ ﺍﺠﺯﺍﺀ ﺭﺍ ﺨﺎﻤﻮﺶ ﻜﺭﺪﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻘﺒﻝ ﺍﺰ ﻮﺼﻝ ﻜﺭﺪﻦ ﺍﺠﺰﺍﺀ ﺪﻴﻛﺭ ﺒﻪ ﺍﻴﻦ ﭙﺧﺶ ﻜﻨﻧﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﻤﻄﻣﺋﻦ‬
‫ﺁﻨﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺨﺎﻤﻮﺶ ﻜﺭﺪﻩ ﺍﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻮﺸﺎﺨﻪ ﺍﺼﻠﻰ ﺪﺴﺘﮔﺎﻩ ﺒﻌﻧﻮﺍﻦ ﻴﻚ ﻮﺴﻴﻠﻪ ﻘﻃﻊ ﻜﻨﻧﺪﻩ ﺒﻪ ﻜﺎﺭ ﺒﺭﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻤﻰ ﺸﻭﺪ ﻠﺫﺍ ﻤﻮﻘﻌﻳﺕ ﺁﻦ ﺒﺎﻴﺪ ﺒﺭﺍﻱ ﺍﺴﺘﻔﺎﺪﻩ ﺒﻪ ﺁﺳﺎﻨﻲﺪﺭ ﺪﺴﺘﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺒﺎﺸﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺒﺭﺍﻯ ﺍﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﺨﻮﺪ‬
‫ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻤﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺍﺰ ﻴک ﻠﻳﺯﺭ ﺍﺴﺘﻔﺎﺪﻩ ﻤﻰ ﻜﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺴﺘﻔﺎﺪﻩ ﺍﺰ ﻜﻨﺘﺭﻠﻬﺎ ﻴﺎ‪.‬‬‫ ﺍﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺍﺰ ﻴک ﻠﻳﺯﺭ ﺍﺴﺘﻔﺎﺪﻩ ﻤﻰ ﻜﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺴﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺰ ﻜﻨﺘﺭ ﻠﻬﺎ‬‫ﻴﺎ ﺘﻧﻅﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻮ ﺍﺠﺭﺍﻯ ﺭﻮﺸﻬﺎﻴﻰ ﺒﺠﺰ ﺁﻨﺎﻨﻰ ﻜﻪ ﺪﺭ ﺍﻴﻧﺠﺎ‬
‫ﻤﺸﺧﺹ ﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺴﺕ ﻤﻣﻜﻦ ﺍﺴﺕ ﻤﻨﺠﺭ ﺒﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻤﻌﺭﺽ ﻘﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﮔﺭﻔﺘﻦ ﺘﺸﻌﺸﻌﺎﺕ ﺧﻃﺭﻨﺎک ﮔﺭﺩﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺭﻭﻜﺸﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺒﺎﺰ ﻨﻜﻨﻴﺩ ﻮ ﺧﻮﺪ ﺪﺴﺘﻛﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺘﻌﻣﻴﺭ ﻨﻜﻨﻳﺪ‪.‬‬‫ﺒﺍﻯ ﺴﺭﻮﻴﺲ ﻜﺭﺪﻦ ﺒﻪ ﭙﺭﺴﻨﻝ ﺘﺎﻴﻴﺩ ﺸﺩﻩ ﻤﺭﺍﺠﻌﻪ ﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺤﺘﻴﺎﻃ‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﭙﺧﺶ ﻜﻧﻨﺪﻩ ﺸﻤﺎ ﺒﺭﺍﻯ ﻤﺼﺎ ﺭﻑ ﺧﺎ ﻨﻛﻰ ﺍﺴﺕ ﻮ ﺒﺭﺍﻯ ﺍﺴﺘﻔﺎﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺼﻨﻌﺘﻰ ﻤﻨﺎﺳﺏ ﻨﻤﻰ ﺒﺎﺸﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺰ ﺍﻴﻦ ﺪﺴﺘﮔﺎﻩ ﻔﻘﻄ ﺒﺭﺍﻯ ﺍﺴﺘﻔﺎﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺸﺧﺼﻰ ﺍﺴﺘﻔﺎﺪﻩ ﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮔﺎﻩ ﻨﺒﺎﻴﺪ ﺪﺭ ﻤﻌﺭﺾ ﺭﻴﺯﺶ ﻘﻄﺭﺍﺕ ﻴﺎ ﭙﺎﺸﻴﺪﻩ ﺸﺪﻦ ﻤﺎﻴﻌﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻘﺭﺍﺭ ﮔﺭﻔﺘﻪ ﻮ ﻨﺒﺎﻴﺪ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺸﻲﺀ ﭙﺭ ﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻤﺎﻴﻌﺎﺕ ﻤﺎﻨﻧﺩ ﮔﻠﺪﻦ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﻮﻱ ﺪﺴﺘﮔﺎﻩ ﻘﺭﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺸﻭﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻝ ﺨﺎﺭﺠﻰ ﻤﺎﻨﻧﺩ ﺭﻮﺸﻨﺎﻴﻰ ﻮ ﺍﻠﻜﺘﺭ ﻴﺴﻴﺘﻪ ﺴﺎﻜﻦ ﻤﻲ ﺘﻮﺍﻨﺩ ﺭﻮﻯ‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻋﺎﺪﻯ ﺍﻴﻦ ﺩﺴﺗﻛﺎﻩ ﺘﺎﺜﻴﺭ ﺒﻛﺬﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺭ ﺍﻴﻦ ﺍﺘﻔﺎﻕ ﺍﻔﺘﺎﺩ ﭙﺧﺶ‬
‫ﻜﻨﻧﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺒﺎ ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ‪ POWER‬ﺨﺎﻣﻭﺶ ﻮ ﺭﻮﺸﻦ ﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻴﺎ ﺴﻴﻢ ﺒﺭﻕ‬
‫‪ AC‬ﺩﺴﺘﮔﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺰ ﭙﺭﻴﺰ ﺒﺭﻕ ﻘﻃﻊ ﻜﺭﺩﻩ ﻮ ﺪﻮﺒﺎﺭﻩ ﻮﺼﻝ ﻜﻨﻴﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﭙﺧﺶ ﻜﻨﻧﺪﻩ ﺒﻃﻮﺭ ﻋﺎﺩﻯ ﻜﺎﺭ ﺨﻮﺍﻫﺩ ﻨﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻧﻜﺎﻤﻰ ﻜﻪ ﺒﺨﺎﻃﺭ ﺘﻐﻴﻳﺭ ﻨﺎﮔﻬﺎ ﻨﻰ ﺩﺭﺠﻪ ﺤﺮﺍﺮﺕ ﺒﺧﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺴﺘﻛﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺤﻣﻊ ﻤﻰ ﺸﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﭙﺨﺶ ﻜﻨﻧﺩﻩ ﻤﻣﻜﻦ ﺍﺴﺕ ﺪﺭﺴﺖ ﻜﺎﺭ ﻨﻜﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺭ ﺍﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺘﻔﺎﻕ ﺍﻔﺘﺎﺪ‪ ،‬ﭙﺨﺷ ﻜﻨﻧﺩﻩ ﺭﺍﺩﺭ ﺩﺭﺠﻪ ﺤﺭﺍﺭﺖ ﺍﺘﺎﻖ ﺭﻫﺎ ﻜﻨﻴﺪ ﺘﺎ ﺩﺍﺨﻝ‬
‫ﺪﺴﺘﻛﺎﻩ ﺨﺸک ﺸﺩﻩ ﻮ ﺒﺭﺍﻯ ﻜﺎﺭ ﺁﻣﺎﺪﻩ ﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬
‫‪ .۴‬ﺩﻴﺴک‬
‫ ﺍﺰ ﺍﺴﭙﺭ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻴﻤﻳﺯ ﻜﻨﻧﺩﻩ ﺼﻔﺤﻪ‪ ،‬ﺒﻨﺰﻦ‪ ،‬ﺘﻴﻨﺭ ﻴﺎ ﺴﺎﻴﺭ ﺤﻼﻠﻬﺎﻯ‬‫ﻔﺭﺍﺭ ﻜﻪ ﻤﻣﻛﻦ ﺍﺴﺕ ﺒﻪ ﺴﻂﺢ ﺩﻴﺳک ﺼﺩﻣﻪ ﺬﺴﺎﻨﻧﺩ ﺍﺴﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻨﻜﻨﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺴﻃﺢ ﺴﻴﻛﻧﺎﻝ ﺩﻴﺳک ﺭﺍ ﻠﺲ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺩ‪ .‬ﻴﺴک ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻠﺒﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻴﺎ ﻴک‬‫ﻠﺒﻪ ﻭ ﺴﻮﺭﺍﺥ ﻤﺭﻜﺰﻯ ﻨﻜﺎﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﻴﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺭﺩ ﻭ ﻏﺒﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺒﻨﺭ ﻤﻰ ﭙﺎک ﻜﻧﻴﺩ؛ ﻫﺭﮔﺯ ﭙﺎﺭﭼﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻯ ﺩﻴﺳک‬
‫ﺒﺠﻠﻮ ﻭ ﻋﻘﺏ ﻨﻜﺴﻴﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۵‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺯﻴﺳﺕ ﻤﻴﻃﻰ‬
‫ ﺒﺎﺘﺭﻯ ﺍﺴﺘﻔﺎﺪﻩ ﺸﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻴﻦ ﻤﺤﺼﻮﻞ ﺤﺎﻮﻯ ﻤﻭﺍﺩ ﺸﻴﻤﻴﺎﻴﻲ ﺍﺴﺖ ﻜﻪ‬‫ﺒﺭﺍﻯ ﻤﺤﻴﻃ ﺰﻴﺴﺕ ﻤﺿﺭ ﻤﻰ ﺒﺎﺸﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺒﻨﺎﺒﺭﺍﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺒﺎﺘﺭﻴﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺒﻪ ﺭﻭﺶ ﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺒﺭ ﺍﺴﺎﺴ ﻤﻘﺭﺭﺍﺕ ﺩﻮﻠﺘﻰ‪،‬‬‫ﺍﻴﺎﻠﺘﻰ ﻮ ﻤﺤﻠﻰ ﺒﺩﻭﺭ ﺒﺭﻴﺰﻴﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻬﺎﻯ ﺫﻱ ﻨﻔﻊ ﺧﺎﺼﻰ ﻤﺠﻮﺰ ﻤﺤﺼﻮﻠﻰ ﻜﻪ ﺒﻬﻤﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻴﻦ ﻫﻨﻤﺎﻯ ﻜﺎﺭﺒﺭﺁﻤﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺴﺕ ﺘﺤﺕ ﺤﻘﻮﻖ ﻤﺎﻠﻛﻴﺕ ﻋﻘﻼﻨﻰ ﮔﺭﻠﻴﻰ ﺒﺭﺍﻯ ﻤﺤﺘﻮﻴﺎﺕ ﻤﺠﻮﺰ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷًﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻤﺤﻮﺩ ﻤﻰ ﺸﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﻴﭻ ﺤﻔﻮﻘﻰ ﺒﺭﺍﻯ ﺍﺸﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺘﺠﺎﺭﻯ ﺍﻋﻃﺎ ﻨﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺴﺙ‪ .‬ﻣﹶﺟﻮﺰﹰ‬
‫ﻫﻳﭻ ﻤﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺩﻴﻜﺭﻯ ﺒﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻴﻦ ﻤﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻨﻤﻰ ﮔﻳﺭﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺠﻮﺯ ﺒﻪ‬
‫ﻫﻳﭻ ﺩﺴﺘﻜﺎﺩﻩ ﻴﺎ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺒﻰ ﻤﺟﻮﺰ ﻜﻪ ﺒﺭ ﺍﺴﺎﺲ ‪ISO/OUR 11172-3‬‬
‫ﻴﺎ ‪ ISO/OUR 13818-3‬ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻴﻦ ﺩﺴﺘﻜﺎﻩ ﺍﺴﺘﻔﺎﺪﻩ ﺸﺩﻩ ﻴﺎ ﻫﻤﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺩﺴﺗﻜﺎﻩ ﻔﺭﻮﺧﺗﻪ ﻤﻰ ﺸﻭﺩ ﻤﺭﺒﻮﻃ ﻨﻤﻰ ﮔﺭﺪﺩ‪ .‬ﻤﺠﻭﺯ ﻔﻘﻃ ﺍﺴﺘﻔﺎﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺩﺴﺘﻜﺎﻩ ﺒﺭﺍﻯ ﺭﻤﺯ ﮔﺫﺍﺭﻯ ﻮ‪/‬ﻴﺎ ﻤﺰ ﮔﺸﺎﻴﻰ ﻔﺎ ﻳﻠﻬﺎﻯ ﺼﻮﺘﻰ ﻤﻃﺎﺒﻖ ﺍﺴﺘﺎﻨﺩﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫‪ ISO/OUR 11172-3‬ﻴﺎ ‪ ISO/OUR 13818-3‬ﺭﺍ ﭙﻮﺸﺶ ﻤﻰ ﺩﻫﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻳﭻ ﺤﻘﻮﻘﻲ ﺒﺭﺍﻯ ﻮﻴژﮔﻳﻬﺎﻯ ﻤﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻴﺎ ﻋﻣﺎﻛﺭ ﺩﻫﺎﻴﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺒﺭ ﺍﺴﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺍﺴﺘﺎﻨﺩﺍﺭﺩﻫﺎﻯ ‪ ISO/OUR 11172-3‬ﻴﺎ ‪ ISO/OUR 13818-3‬ﻨﻤﻰ‬
‫ﺒﺎﺸﻨﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻨﻅﺭ ﮔﺭﻔﺘﻪ ﻨﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺴﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺤﺘﻳﺎﻃ ‪ :‬ﺍﺴﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺰ ﻜﻨﺘﺭﻠﻬﺎ ﻴﺎ ﺘﻨﻈﻴﻣﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﺠﺭﺍﻯ ﺭﻮﺷﻬﺎﻴﻰ ﺒﺠﺰ ﺁﻨﺎﻨﻰ ﻜﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻴﻨﺠﺎ ﻤﺸﺧﺹ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺴﺕ ﻤﻣﻛﻦ ﺍﺴﺕ ﻤﻨﺠﺭ ﺒﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻤﻌﺭﺽ ﻘﺭﺍﺭ ﮔﺭﻔﺘﻦ‬
‫ﺘﺸﻌﺸﻌﺎﺕ ﺧﻃﺭﻨﺎک ﻤﻰ ﮔﺭﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺤﺘﻴﺎﻄﻬﺎ ‪٢......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﻭﯾﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎﻯﻋﻤﻭﻣﻰ‪٢.............................................................‬‬
‫ﺸﺭﺡ ‪٣..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﮔﺷﺗﻰ ﺪﺮ ﻛﻧﺗﺭﻞ ﺯﺮﺍﻩ ﺪﻭﺭ‪٣..................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺘﺼﺎﻻﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻨﺘﺧﺎﺏ ﻴک ﺍﺘﺼﺎﻞ‪۴...........................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺪﻫﺎﻯ ﺍﺻﻠﻰ‬
‫ﭙﺨﺶ ﻜﺮﺪﻦ ﻳک ﺪﻴﺴک‪۵......................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺴﺗﻓﺎﺪﻩ ﻜﺮﺪﻦ ﺍﺯﻋﻤﻠﻜﺭﺪﻫﺎﻯ ﺟﺴﺘﺟﻭ ﻭ ﭙﺭﺶ‪۵..............................‬‬
‫ﺍﺴﺗﻓﺎﺪﻩ ﻜﺮﺪﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻣﻜﺭﺪ ﻧﻤﺎﻴﺵ‪۵.............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺴﺗﻓﺎﺪﻩ ﻜﺮﺪﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻧﻭﻯ ﺪﻴﺴک ﻭﻋﻨﻭﺍﻦ‪۵.....................................‬‬
‫ﭙﺧﺶ ﺘﻛﺮﺍﺮﻯ ‪۵................................................................‬‬
‫ﭙﺨﺶ ﺁﻫﺴﺘﻪ‪۶...................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻛﺭﺪﻫﺎیﭙﻴﺷﺭﻔﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺘﻨﻇﻳﻢ ﻛﺭﺪﻦ ﺪﺮﺟﻪ ﺑﺯﺮ ﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﻰ )ﻧﻤﺎﻯ ‪۶...............................(EZ‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺗﺨﺎﺏ ﻜﺭﺪﻦ ﺯﻧﺎﻦ ﺼﺪﺍ ‪۶....................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺗﺨﺎﺏ ﻜﺭﺪﻦ ﺯﻧﺎﻦ ﺯﻴﺮ ﻧﻭﻴﺲ ‪۶.............................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻴﺮﺪﺍﺪﻦ ﺯﺍﻭﻴﻪ ﺪﻭﺭﺒﻳﻦ ‪۶....................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺴﺘﻔﺎﺪﻩ ﻜﺮﺪﻥ ﺍﺯﻋﻤﻛﺮﺪ ﻨﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﮔﺫﺍﺮﻯ ‪۶......................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺴﺗﻓﺎﺪﻩ ﻜﺮﺩﻦﺍﺯﻋﻣﻜﺭﺪﺑﺯﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﻰ‪٧...........................................‬‬
‫ﻤﻨﻭﻱ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺖ ‪٧.......... MP3/WMA/JPEG/MPEG4/CD Audio‬‬
‫ﺍﻨﺘﺧﺎﺏ ﻛﺮﺪﻥ ﭘﻭﺷﻪ ‪٧..........................................................‬‬
‫ﭙﺨﺶ ‪٧.......................................MP3/WMA/ CD Audio‬‬
‫ﭙﺨﺶ ‪٨.............................................................MPEG4‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻴﻠﻬﺎي رﺳﺎﻧﻪ اي ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎدﻩ از ﻗﺎ ﺑﻠﻴﺖ ‪USB Host‬‬
‫)ﻴﻣﺰﺑﺎن ‪٨............................................................. (USB‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﺳﻲ دي ‪٩.................................................................‬‬
‫ﭙﺧﺵ ﺴﻰ ﺩﻯ ﻋﻛﺱ ‪٩.........................................................‬‬
‫ﺘﻐﻳﻴﺭﺪﺍﺪﻥ ﻤﻨﻭﻯ ﺘﻨﻇﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺴﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻤﻧﻭﻯ ﺘﻨﻇﻳﻢ‪١٠.....................................................‬‬
‫ﺘﻧﻇﻳﻢ ﻜﺮﺪﻦ ﮔﺯﻴﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻨﻤﺎﻴﺶ ‪١٠...........................................‬‬
‫ﺘﻧﻇﻳﻢ ﻜﺮﺪﻦ ﮔﺯﻴﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺼﺪﺍ ‪١٠.............................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‪١٠...................................................‬‬
‫ﺘﻧﻇﻳﻢ ﻜﺮﺪﻦ ﻭﻴﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎﻯ ﺯﺑﺎﻦ ‪١٠..............................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ اﻣﻨﻴﺘﯽ‪١٠...................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ ‪١١.................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ‪١١................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺘﻘﺎﻱ ﺴﻔﺖ ﺍﻔﺯﺍﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻴﺐ ﺑﺎﺑﻰ‪١١...................................................................‬‬
‫ﻤﺸﺨﺻﺎﺖ ‪١۲..................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫وﮋﮔﻬﺎى ﻋﻤﻮﻣۑ‬
‫ﺼﺩﺍﻯ ﻋﺎﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺪﺍﻠﺒﻰ ﺪﻴﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﻜﻪ ﻔﻦ ﺁﻮﺭﻯ ﺘﻮﺴﻌﻪ ﻴﺎﻔﺘﻪ ﺘﻮﺴﻃ ﺁﺰﻤﺎﻴﺸﻛﺎﻫﻬﺎﻯ ﺩﺍﻠﺒﻰ ﻤﻰ‬
‫ﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺼﺩﺍﻯ ﺒﺳﻴﺎﺭ ﺸﻔﺎﻑ ﺭﺍ ﺘﻮﻠﻳﺩ ﻤﺠﺩﺩ ﻤﻰ ﻧﻣﺎﻴﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺼﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﻫﻡ ﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻤﻌﻤﻭﻠﻰ ﻭ ﻫﻡ ﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺼﻔﺤﻪ ﭙﻬﻦ )‪ (١۶:٩‬ﺭﺍ ﻤﻰ ﺘﻭﺍﻦ ﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻜﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺤﺭﻜﺕ ﺁﻫﺴﺘﻪ‬
‫ﻴک ﺼﺤﻧﻪ ﻤﻬﻡ ﺭﺍ ﻤﻰ ﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺤﺭﻜﺕ ﺁﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﻤﺸﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﻜﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻜﻨﺘﺭﻝ ﻮﺍﻠﺪﻴﻦ )‪.(DVD‬‬
‫ﻜﻨﺘﺭﻝ ﻭﺍﻠﺩﻴﻦ ﺒﻪ ﻜﺎﺭﺒﺭﺍﻦ ﺍﺠﺎﺰﻩ ﻤﻰ ﺩﻫﺩ ﺘﺎ ﺴﻃﺢ ﻤﻭﺭﺩ ﻨﻴﺎﺰ ﺭﺍ ﺒﺭﺍﻯ‬
‫ﺟﻠﻭﮔﻳﺭﻯ ﻜﻭﺩﻜﺎﻦ ﺍﺰ ﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻔﻴﻠﻤﻬﺎﻯ ﻤﺿﺭ ﻤﺎﻨﻧﺩ ﻔﻳﻠﻤﻬﺎﻯ ﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻯ‬
‫ﺧﺸﻭﻨﺕ‪ ،‬ﻤﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻤﺭﺒﻮﻄ ﺒﻪ ﺒﺰﺭﮔﺳﺎﻻﻦ ﻮ ﻏﻳﺭﻩ‪ ،‬ﺘﻧﻅﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﻴﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻛﺭﺩﻫﺎﻯ ﻤﺧﺘﻠﻑ ﻤﻨﻮﻯ ﺭﻮﻯ ﺼﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﻤﻰ ﺘﻮﺍﻨﻴﺩ ﺯﺒﺎﻧﻬﺎﻯ ﻤﺧﺘﻠﻑ )ﺼﺩﺍ‪/‬ﺰﻴﺭﻨﻮﻴﺲ( ﻮ ﺰﻮﺍﻳﺎﻯ ﺼﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺤﻴﻦ ﻠﺫﺕ ﺒﺭﺩﻦ ﺍﺰ ﻔﻴﻠﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻨﺘﺧﺎﺏ ﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺴﻜﻦ ﺘﺩﺭﻴﺟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﺴﻜﻦ ﻜﺭﺩﻦ ﺘﺩﺭﻴﺠﻰ ﺘﺼﻮﻴﺭ ﺒﻬﺒﻮﺩ ﻴﺎﻘﺘﻪ ﺍﻯ ﺭﺍ ﺒﻭﺴﻳﻠﻪ ﺩﻮﺒﺭﺍﺒﺭ ﻜﺭﺩﻦ‬
‫ﺧﻃﻮﻃ ﺍﺴﻜﻦ ﻨﺴﺒﺖ ﺒﻪ ﺘﺼﻮﻴﺭ ﺁﻤﻴﺧﺘﻪ ﻤﻌﻤﻮﻠﻰﺭﺍ ﺍﻴﺟﺎﺪ ﻤﻰ ﻜﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻨﻤﺎﻯ ‪) EZ‬ﺩﻯ ﻮﻯ ﺩﻯ(‬
‫ﻨﻤﺎﻰ ﺁﺴﻦ ﺘﻮﺍﻨﺎﻴﻰ ﺘﻨﻅﻴﻢ ﺘﺼﻮﻴﺭ ﺭﺍﺒﺭﺍﻯ ﺘﻄﺎﺒﻕ ﺒﺎ ﺍﻧﺩﺍﺰﻩ ﺼﻔﺤﻪ )‪١۴:٩‬‬
‫ﻴﺎ ‪ (۴:٣‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺭﺍﺌﻪ ﻤﻰ ﻜﻧﻴﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻨﻤﺎﻴﺸﮔﺭ ﻋﻜﺱ ﺩﻴﺟﻴﺎﻝ )‪(JPEG‬‬
‫ﻤﻰ ﺘﻮﺍﻨﻴﺩ ﻋﻛﺳﻬﺎﻯ ﺩﻴﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺭﺍﺩﺭ ﺘﻠﻮﻴﺰﻴﻭﻦ ﺨﻮﺩ ﻤﺸﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﻜﻨﻴﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺘﻛﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻤﻰ ﺘﻮﺍﻨﻴﺩ ﻴک ﺁﻫﻧک ﻴﺎ ﻔﻳﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺒﺴﺎﺩﮔﻰ ﺒﺎ ﻔﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻦ ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ‪REPEAT‬‬
‫ﺘﻜﺭﺍﺭ ﻜﻨﻴﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪MP3/WMA‬‬
‫ﺍﻴﻦ ﺩﺴﺘﻛﺎﻩ ﻤﻰ ﺘﻮﺍﻨﺩ ﺩﻴﺳﻜﻬﺎﻯ ﺍﻴﺟﺎﺭ ﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺰ ﻔﺎ ﻴﻠﻬﺎﻯ ‪MP3/WMA‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﭙﺧﺶ ﻜﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪MPEG4‬‬
‫ﺍﻴﻦ ﺪﺳﺘﻛﺎﻩ ﻤﻲ ﺘﻮﺍﻨﺩ ﻔﺭﻤﺕ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ MPEG4‬ﺭﺍﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺤﻝ ﻴک ﻔﺎﻴﻠﻰ ‪avi‬‬
‫ﭙﺧﺶ ﻜﻨﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﺳﻲ دي‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ اﺟﺎزﻩ ﻣﻲ دهﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎي ﺻﻮﺗﻲ را از دﻳﺴﻚ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ‬
‫‪ MP3‬روي ﻳﻚ وﺳﻴﻠﻪ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺮﻳﺰﻳﺪ‪) .‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺳﻲ دي ﺻﻮﺗﻲ )‪.((CD-DA‬‬
‫ﺘﺫﻜﺭ‬
‫ﺨﻂﺭﻧﺎک ﻠﻳﺯﺭ ﮔﺭﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺸﺧﺻﺎً ﺍﻘﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺒﺎﺯﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺪﺭﭙﻭﺵ‬
‫ ﺩﻴﺳﻜﻬﺎﻯ ﻜﻪ ﻨﻤﻰ ﺘﻮﺍﻦ ﺍﻨﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺒﺎ ﺍﻴﻦ ﭙﺧﺶ ﻜﻨﻧﺩﻩ ﭙﺧﺷ ﻨﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬‫• ‪DVD-RAM‬‬
‫• ‪DVD-ROM‬‬
‫• ‪CDV‬‬
‫• ‪CD-ROM‬‬
‫• ‪CVD‬‬
‫• ‪CDI‬‬
‫ ﺘﻮﺍﻨﺎﻴﻰ ﭙﺧﺶ ﻤﻣﻜﻦ ﺍﺴﺕ ﺒﻪ ﺸﺮﺍﻴﻄ ﻀﺒﻄ ﻜﺭﺩﻦ ﺒﺴﺘﻜﻰ ﺩﺍﺸﺘﻪ ﺒﺎﺸﺪ‪.‬‬‫• ‪DVD-R, +R‬‬
‫• ‪CD-RW‬‬
‫• )ﺤﺎﻠﺕ ‪DVD+RW, -RW (V‬‬
‫ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺴﺘﻜﺎﻩ ﻤﻣﻛﻦ ﺍﺴﺕ ﺩﻴﺴﻜﻬﺎﻰ ﺧﺎﺼﻰ ﻤﺎﻨﻧﺩ ‪.،CD-R‬‬‫‪ CD-RW‬ﻭ ‪ DVD-R‬ﺭﺍﺒﺧﺎﻄﺭ ﻨﻮﻉ ﺩﻴﺳک ﻴﺎ ﺸﺭﺍﻴﻃ ﺿﺒﻃ‪ ،‬ﭙﺧﺶ‬
‫ﻨﻜﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺪﺴﺗﮔﺎﻩ ﻴﺎ ﺍﻨﺟﺎﻡ ﺘﻌﻣﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻨﮐﻨﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺠﻬﺕ ﺘﻌﻣﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺒﻪ ﭙﺭﺴﻧﻞ‬
‫ﺤﻔﺎ ﻅﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺒﺭﺍﺒﺭ ﻨﺴﺧﻪ ﺒﺭﺩﺍﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺒﺳﻴﺎﺭﻯ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻴﺴﻛﻬﺎﻯ ﺩﻯ ﻮﻯ ﺩﻯ ﺒﺎ ﺤﻔﺎﻅﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺒﺭﺍﺒﺭ ﻨﺴﺧﻪ ﺒﺭﺩﺍﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺭﻤﺰﮔﺫﺍﺭﻯ ﺸﺩﻩ ﺍﻨﺩ‪ .‬ﺒﺩﻴﻦ ﺧﺎﻃﺭ‪ ،‬ﺴﻤﺎ ﺒﺎﻴﺩ ﭙﺧﺶ ﻜﻨﻧﺩﻩ ﺩﻯ ﻮﻯ ﺩﻯ ﺧﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺒﻄﻮﺭ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻳﻢ ﺒﻪ ﺘﻠﻮﻴﺰﻴﻮﻦ‪ ،‬ﻨﻪ ﺒﻪ ﺩﺴﺘﮔﺎﻩ ﻮﻴﺩﺌﻭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺼﻝ ﻜﻨﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻮﺼﻝ ﻜﺭﺩﻦ ﺒﻪ ﻮﻴﺩ ﺌﻮ ﻤﻣﻛﻦ ﺍﺴﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻴﺴﻜﻬﺎﻯ ﺩﻯ ﻮﻯ ﺩﻯ ﺤﻔﺎﻅﺕ‬
‫ﺸﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺒﺭﺍﺒﺭ ﻨﺳﺧﻪ ﺒﺭﺩﺍﺭﻯ ﻤﻨﺠﺭ ﺒﻪ ﺘﺼﻮﻴﺭ ﺧﺭﺍﺏ ﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﻣﻮرد ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﻨﺎورﯼ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ در ﺑﺮاﺑﺮ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﺑﺮدارﯼ اﺳﺖ‬
‫ﮐﻪ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺖ ﻗﻮاﻧﻴﻦ ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﺛﺒﺖ اﺧﺘﺮاﻋﺎت اﻳﺎﻻت ﻣﺘﺤﺪﻩ ﺁﻣﺮﻳﮑﺎ‬
‫و ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺣﻘﻮق ﻣﺎﻟﮑﻴﺖ ﻣﻌﻨﻮﯼ ﺷﺮﮐﺖ ‪ ROVI‬ﻗﺮار دارﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺳﯽ‬
‫ﻣﻌﮑﻮس و ﺟﺪاﺳﺎزﯼ اﺟﺰاء ﻣﻤﻨﻮع اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺭﻮﺠﻴﻬﺎﻯ ﺍﺴﻜﻦ ﺘﺩﺭﻴﺟﻰ‬
‫"ﻤﺼﺭﻑ ﻜﻨﻧﺩﮔﻦ ﺒﺎﻴﺩ ﺘﻮﺠﻪ ﺩﺍﺸﺘﻪ ﺒﺎﺸﻨﺩ ﻜﻪ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﻰ ﺘﻠﻭﻴﺯﻴﻮﻨﻬﺎﻯ ﭙﻴﺸﺭﻔﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺒﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻤﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺒﻄﻮﺭ ﻜﺎﻤﻝ ﺴﺎﺰﮔﺎﺭ ﻨﻤﻰ ﺒﺎﺸﻧﺩ ﻮ ﻤﻣﻜﻦ ﺍﺴﺖ ﺒﺎﻋﺚ ﺘﻮﻠﻴﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺸﻜﺎﻞ ﺩﺭ ﭙﺧﺶ ﺘﺼﻮﻴﺮ ﺸﻮﻨﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻤﻮﺭﺩ ﻤﺴﺎﺌﻝ ﺘﺼﻮﻴﺭ ‪ ۶٧۵‬ﺍﺴﻜﻦ ﺘﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻴﺠﻰ ﺘﻭﺼﻳﻪ ﻤﻲ ﺸﻮﺪ ﻜﻪ ﻜﺎﺭﺒﺭ ﺍﺘﺼﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺒﻪ ﺨﺭﻮﻴﺠﻰ "ﻨﻭﻉ ﺍﺴﺘﺎﻨﺪﺍﺭﺩ"‬
‫ﺘﻐﻴﻴﺭ ﻫﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺭ ﺩ ﻤﻭﺭﺩ ﺴﺎﺰﮔﺎﺭﻯ ﺘﻠﻭﻴﺰﻴﻮﻦ ﺨﻭﺩ ﺒﺎ ﻤﺩﻞ ﭘﺧٍﺶ ﻜﻨﻧﺩﻩ ﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻮﻯ ﺩﻯ‪ p۶٧۵‬ﺴﺌﻭﺍﻻﺘﻰ ﺩﺍﺭﻴﺩ‪ ،‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎﹰ ﺒﺎ ﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺨﺩﻤﺎﺕ ﻤﺸﺘﺭﻴﺎﻦ ﺴﺎﻤﻮﺴﻮﻨگ‬
‫ﺘﻤﺎﺱ ﺒﮔﻴﺭﻴﺩ‪".‬‬
‫ﻤﺣﺻﻭﻞ ﻟﻳﺯﺭﻯ ﻜﻼس‪١‬‬
‫ﻮﺍﺠﺩ ﺸﺭﺍﻳﻂ ﻤﺭﺍﺠﻌﻪ ﻨﻣﺎﻴﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪LASER PRODUCT‬‬
‫‪LASER PRODUKT‬‬
‫‪LASER LAITE‬‬
‫‪LASER APPARAT‬‬
‫‪LÁSER CLASE 1‬‬
‫‪CLASS 1‬‬
‫‪KLASSE 1‬‬
‫‪LUOKAN 1‬‬
‫‪KLASS 1‬‬
‫‪PRODUCTO‬‬
‫ﻠﻭﺍﺯﻡ ﺠﺎﻨﺑﻰ‬
‫ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻛﻮاﻛﺴﻴﺎل ‪ /‬ﻛﻮاﻛﺴﻴﺎل‬‫ ﺪﺴﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻛﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺮﺍﻩ ﺪﻭﺭ‬‫ ﺪﻓﺗﺭﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎ‬‫ﻋﻼﺌﻢ ﺪﻴﺳک‬
‫~‬
‫‪PAL‬‬
‫ﺍﻴﻥ ﺪﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ®‪ DivX Certified‬ﺒﻭﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻘﺎﺩﺭﺒﻪ ﭙﺧﺵ ﻓﻳﻟﻡ ﻫﺎﻯ‬
‫‪ DivX‬ﻤﻰ ﺒﺎﺸﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺒﺭﺍﻯ ﻛﺳﺏ ﺍﻂﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺒﻳﺸﺗﺭ ﻭ ﺍﺸﻧﺎﻴﻰ ﺒﺎ ﻨﺭﻡ ﺍﻔﺯﺍﺭﻫﺎﻯ ﻤﺑﺩﻝ ﺠﻬﺕ‬
‫ﻔﺎﻴﻞ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺨﻭﺩ ﺒﻪ ﻔﺭﻤﺕ ‪ DivX‬ﺒﻪ ﻨﺷﺎﻨﻰ ‪www.dixv.com‬‬
‫ﻤﺭﺍﺠﻌﻪ ﻛﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺪﺭﺒﺎﺭﻩ ‪ : DivX Video -On-Demand‬ﺍﻳﻥ ﺪﺴﺗﮕﺎﻩ ®‪Certified‬‬
‫‪ DivX‬ﺒﺭﺍﻯ ﺍﻴﻧﻜﻪ ﺒﺗﻭﺍﻨﺩ ﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻫﺎﻯ )‪Video-on-Demand (VOD‬‬
‫ﺷﺮح‬
‫‪۴ ۵ ۶‬‬
‫▼‬
‫▼‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫▼‬
‫▼‬
‫▼‬
‫ﺸﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻤﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﭙﺧﺶ‬
‫ﺴﻴﺴﻢ ﭙﺧﺶ ‪ PAL‬ﺩﺭ ﺒﺭﻴﺘﺎﻨﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﻔﺭﺍﺴﻪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻠﺎﻦ ﻮ‬
‫ﻏﻳﺭﻩ‬
‫‪STEREO‬‬
‫ﺩﻴﺴک ﺍﺴﺘﺭﻴﻭ‬
‫‪DIGITAL‬‬
‫‪SOUND‬‬
‫ﺩﻴﺴک ﺼﻭﺘﻰ ﺩﻴﺠﻳﺘﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺩﻴﺴک ‪MP3‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻤﻨﻄﻘﻪ‬
‫ﻫﻢ ﭙﺧﺶ ﻜﻨﻧﺩﻩ ﺪﻯ ﻮﻯ ﺩﻯ ﻮ ﻫﻢ ﺩﺴﻜﻬﺎ ﺒﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻤﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺍﻯ ﻜﺩ‬
‫ﮔﺫﺍﺭﻯ ﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﻨﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻴﻦ ﻜﺩﻫﺎﻯ ﻤﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺍﻯ ﺒﺎﻴﺩ ﺒﺭﺍﻯ ﭙﺧﺶ ﺪﻴﺳک ﺒﺎﻴﺩ‬
‫ﺒﺎ ﻴﻜﺩﻴﮔﺭ ﻤﻄﺎﺒﻘﺕ ﺩﺍﺸﺘﻪ ﺒﺎﺸﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺭ ﻜﺩﻫﺎ ﺒﺎﻴﻛﺩﻴﮔﺭ ﻤﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻨﺒﺎﺸﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺩﻴﺳک ﭙﺧﺶ ﻨﺧﻮﺍﻫﺩ ﺸﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۱‬ﺳﻨۑ دﻳﺴﻚ‬
‫ﻴﺳﮏ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﺍﻴﻧﺟﺎ ﻘﺭﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻧﻤﺎﺸﮕﺮ‬
‫ﻨﺷﺎﻨﮔﺭﻫﺎﻯ ﻋﻣﻟﻳﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻴﻧﺟﺎ ﻨﻣﺎﻴﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻤﻰ ﺸﻭﻨﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺑﺎز‪/‬ﺑﺴﺘ ) (‬
‫ﺒﺭﺍﻯ ﺒﺎﺯ ﻜﺭﺩﻥ ﻴﺎ ﺒﺳﺗﻥ ﺴﻳﻧﻰ ﺩﻴﺳﮏ ﺁﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻔﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫‪١۴‬‬
‫‪١۵‬‬
‫‪١٨‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﻄﺑﻗﻪ ﺒﻧﺩﻯ ﺸﺩﻩ ﺍﺴﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﺴﺗﻓﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻞ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺘﻧﻆﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﻴﺎ ﺍﺠﺭﺍﻯ ﺮﻭﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺠﻮﺍﺰ ‪DivX‬‬
‫ﺍﺤﺗﻳﺎﻁ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻘﺭﺍﺭﻔﺗﻥ ﺩﺭﻤﻌﺭﺽ ﭙﺮﺘﻭ ﺨﻭﺩﺍﺭﻯ ﻛﻧﻳﺩ )‪(IEC 60825-1‬‬
‫ ﺍﻴﻥ ﺩﺴﺗﮔﺎﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺸﻌﻪ ﻠﻳﺯﺭ ﺍﺴﺗﻓﺎﺩﻩ ﻤﻰ ﻛﻧﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺴﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯﻛﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﻫﺎ ﻴﺎ‬‫ﺘﻧﻆﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﻴﺎ ﺍﺠﺭﺍﻯ ﺮﻭﻴﻪ ﻫﺎﻴﻰ ﻏﻳﺭﺍﺯﻤﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻤﺷﺧﺹ ﺸﺩﻩ ﺪﺭ ﺍﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺪﻔﺗﺭﭽﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﻤﻰ ﺘﻭﺍﻨﺩ ﺒﺎﻋﺙ ﻘﺭﺍﺭﮔﻳﺭﻯ ﺩﺭ ﻤﻌﺭﺽ ﺘﺎﺒﺵ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫‪١٧‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺘﺎﺒﺵ ﻤﺭﺌﻰ ﻭ ﻨﺎﻤﺭﺌﻰ ﻠﻳﺯﺭ ﻛﻼﺱ ‪ 3B‬ﺩﺭ ﺼﻭﺭﺕ ﺒﺎﺯ ﺸﺩﻥ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ‬
‫‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻥ ﺪﺳﺗﮔﺎﻩ ﭘﺧﺵ ﺪﻴﺳﮏ ﻔﺷﺭﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺒﻪ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﻤﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻠﻳﺯﺭی ﮐﻼﺱ ﺍ‬
‫ﻫﺎﻴﻰ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﺰﻤﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻤﺷﺧﺹ ﺸﺩﻩ ﺪﺭﺍﻴﻥ ﺪﻔﺗﺭﭽﻪ ﺮﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﻤﻰ ﺘﻭﺍﻧﺪ‬
‫‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺸﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻤﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺍﻴﻦ ﭙﺧﺶ ﻜﻨﻧﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﭙﺎﻨﻝ ﭙﺸﺕ ﭙﺧﺶ ﻜﻨﻧﺩﻩ ﺸﺭﺡ ﺩﺓﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺸﺩﻩ ﺍﺴﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺒﺎﺭﻩ ‪ DivX® : DivX Video‬ﻴﮏ ﻔﺭﻤﺕ ﻮﻴﺩﻴﻭﻴﻰ ﺪﻴﺟﻳﺗﺎ ﻠﻰ ﺍﺒﺩﺍﻉ‬
‫ﺸﺩﻩ ﺘﻭﺴﻁ ‪ ،DivX, LLC‬ﺍﺰ ﺰﻳﺮﻤﺠﻣﻭﻋﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ‬
‫‪ Rovi Corporation‬ﺍﺴﺕ‪.‬‬
‫®‪ DivX® Certified® ،DivX‬ﻭ ﺁﺭﻡ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻮﺒﺳﺗﻪ ﻋﻼﺌﻡ ﺘﺠﺎﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ Rovi Corporation‬ﻭ ﻴﺎ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻤﺟﻣﻭ ﻋﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺁﻥ ﺒﻭﺩﻩ ﻭﺒﺭ ﺍﺴﺎﺱ‬
‫ﻤﺠﻭﺯ ﺩﺭﻴﺎﻔﺗﻰﺍﺴﺗﻓﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺸﻭﻨﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫®‪ DivX Certified‬ﺒﺭﺍﻯ ﭘﺧﺵ ﻓﻳﻟﻡ ﻫﺎﻯ ®‪ DivX‬ﺘﺎ ﺪﻘﺕ‪ ،‬ﺸﺎﻤﻞ‬
‫ﺒﺭﻨﺎﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺭﺍﻴﮕﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‬
‫‪ .‬ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻣﻜﺚ ) (‬
‫‬
‫ﭘﺧﺵ ﺩﻴﺳﮏ ﺭﺍ ﺸﺭﻭﻉ ﻜﺭﺩﻩ ﻴﺎ ﻤﻛﺙ ﻤﻰ ﺩﻫﺩ‪.‬‬
‫( ‪POWER ON/OFF‬‬
‫‪) .‬‬
‫روﺷﻦ‪/‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻛﻨﯿﺪ و ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه روﺷﻦ‪/‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻣﻴﺰﺑﺎن ‪(USB Host) USB‬‬
‫دورﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﻜﺎﺳﻲ دﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎل‪ ،‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﻜﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪،MP3‬ﻜﺎرت ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‪،‬‬
‫‬
‫ﻳﺮ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ذﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻜرت ﺧﻮان‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎ ﺳﺎز ي ﺑﺮداﺷﺘﻨﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺸﺘۑ در ﻛﻨﺘﺮل زرادور‬
‫‪١۶‬‬
‫ﺒﺎﻋﺙ ﻗﺭﺍﺭﮔﻳﺭﻯ ﺪﺭﻤﻌﺭﺾ ﺨﻃﺭﻨﺎک ﻠﻳﺯﺭ ﮔﺭﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫;‪7,295,673‬‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟﻬﺎى ﭘﺎﻧﻞﺟﻠﻮ‬
‫▼‬
‫ﺩﻴﺴک ﺩﺍﻠﺒﻰ ﺩﻴﺟﻴﺘﺎﻝ‬
‫‪STEREO‬‬
‫‪ DivX‬ﺨﺭﻴﺩﺍﺭﻯ ﺸﺪﻩ ﺮﺍ ﭙﺧﺵ ﻜﻧﺩ ﺒﺎﻴﺩ ﺜﺑﺕ ﺸﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﺒﺭﺍﻯ ﺪﺭﻴﺎﻔﺕ ﻜﺩ‬
‫ﺜﺑﺕ ﺒﻪ ﺒﺧﺵ ‪ DivX VOD‬ﻤﻧﻭﻯ ﺘﻧﻆﻳﻡ ﺪﺴﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺨﻭﺩ ﺒﺭﻮﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺠﻬﺕ ﻜﺳﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻂﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺒﻳﺷﺗﺭ ﺪﺭﺒﺎﺭﻩ ﻨﺣﻭﻩ ﺘﻜﻣﻳﻝ ﺘﺑﺕ ﺒﻪ ‪ vod.divx.com‬ﻤﺭﺍﺠﻌﻪ‬
‫ﻜﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺘﺣﺕ ﭙﻭﺸﺵ ﻴﮏ ﻴﺎﭽﺬﺩ ﺤﻕ ﺍﻤﺘﻳﺎﺯﺍﺯﺍﻳﻥ ﺤﻕ ﺍﻤﺗﻳﺎﺯﻫﺎﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻴﺎﻻﺕ ﻤﺗﺤﺩﻩ ‪7,460,668; 7,515,710; 7,519,274 :‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‪٢.‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫‪ .۱‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ POWER‬دى وى دى‬
‫ﺒﺭﻕ ﺩﺴﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍﺭﻭﺸﻦ ﻴﺎ ﺨﺎﻤﻭﺵ ﻤﻰ ﻜﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪REPEAT‬‬
‫ﺒﻪ ﺴﻣﺎ ﺍﺠﺎﺯﻩ ﻤﻰ ﺩﻫﺩ ﺘﺎ ﻴک ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻦ‪ ،‬ﻔﺻﻝ‪ ،‬ﺘﺭﺍک ﻴﺎ‬
‫ﺩﻴﺳک ﺭﺍ ﺘﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﻜﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪DISC MENU‬‬
‫‬
‫ﻤﻧﻭﻯ ﺩﻴﺳک ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻯ ﺼﻓﺣﻪ ﻂﺎﻫﺭ ﻤﻰ ﻜﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪REPEAT A-B‬‬
‫ﻴک ﻘﺴﻤﺖ ﺍﻨﺗﺨﺎﺏ ﺸﺪﻩ )‪.(A-B‬‬
‫‪ .‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎى ‪(k/K) SEARCH‬‬
‫ﺒﻪ ﺸﻣﺎ ﺍﺠﺎﺯﻩ ﻤﻰ ﺩﻫﺩ ﺘﺎ ﺠﺳﺗﺟﻭ ﺒﺟﻭ‪/‬ﻋﻗﺏﺭﺍﺩﺭ ﺩﻴﺳک ﺍﻨﺟﺎﻡ‬
‫‬
‫ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪(˚) STOP‬‬
‫ﭙﺧﺶ ﺮﺍ ﻤﺗﻭﻘﻑ ﻤﻰ ﻜﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎى ‪(|k/K|) SKIP‬‬
‫ﺒﺭﺍﻯﭙﺭﺵ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻔﺻﻝ ﻴﺎ ﺘﺭﺍک ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺴﺗﻓﺎﺩﻩ ﻜﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬‬
‫‪ .‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪MENU‬‬
‫ﻤﻧﻭﻯ ﭙﺧﺵ ﻜﻨﻧﺩﻩ ﺩﻯ ﻭﻯ ﺩﻯ ﺭﺍﺭﻭﻯ ﺼﻓﺣﻪ ﻤﻰ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎى†‪ENTER /√/® π/‬‬
‫ﺍﻴﻥ ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ﺒﻪ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﻴک ﺴﻭﻴﭻ ﻀﺎﻤﻥ ﻋﻣﻝ ﻤﻰ ﻜﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪(√) AUDIO‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻴﻥ ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ﺒﺭﺍﻯ ﺩﺴﺗﺭﺴﻰ ﺒﻪ ﻋﻣﻟﻛﺭﺩﻫﺎﻯ ﻤﺧﺗﻟﻑ‬
‫‬
‫ﺼﻭﺘﻰ ﺩﺭ ﻴک ﺩﻴﺳک ﺍﺴﺗﻓﺎﺩﻩ ﻜﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۱‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪TOOLS‬‬
‫ﺤﺎﻠﺕ ﺩﻴﺳک ﻔﻌﻟﻰ ﺭﺍﻨﻣﺎﻴﺵ ﻤﻰ ﺩﻫﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮاﯼ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻋﻨﻮان‬
‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬اﺳﺘﻔﺎدﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮد‬
‫‪ .۱‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪( ) OPEN/CLOSE‬‬
‫ﺒﺭﺍﻯ ﺒﺎﺯ ﻜﺭﺩﻥ ﻴﺎ ﺒﺳﺗﻥ ﺴﻳﻧﻰ ﺩﻴﺳک ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍﻔﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪VIDEO SEL.‬‬
‫ﻔﺭﻤﺕ ﺨﺭﻭﺠﻲ ﺘﺻﻭﻴﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍ ﻨﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﻤﻲ ﻜﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۱‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﺘﺻﻭﻴﺭ ﺩﻱﻭﻱﺩﻱ ﺭﺍﺒﺯﺭ گ ﻤﻲ ﻜﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪MARKER‬‬
‫‪ .‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪(®||) PLAY‬‬
‫ﭙﺧﺵ ﺩﻴﺳک ﺭﺍﺸﺭﻭ ﻉ ﻜﻧﻳﺩ ﻴﺎ ﻤﻛﺙ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪(π) SUBTITLE‬‬
‫ﺰﺒﺎﻥ ﺰﻴﺭ ﻨﻭﻴﺱ ﺪﻳﺳﮏ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻨﺗﺟﺎﺏ ﻤﻲ ﻜﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪RETURN‬‬
‫ﺒﻪ ﻤﻧﻭﻯ ﻘﺑﻟﻰ ﺒﺎﺯ ﻤﻰ ﮔﺭﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪(®) TITLE MENU‬‬
‫‬
‫ﻤﻧﻭﻯ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻯ ﺼﻓﺣﻪ ﻂﺎﻫﺭ ﻤﻰ ﻜﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬دﻛﻤﻪ ‪INFO‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ اﻣﮑﺎن دﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮد ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ را ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﯽ دﻫﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .B‬اﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻴﺰﻴﻮن )آﻣﻴﺨﺘﻪ‪/‬ﺗﺪرﻴﺠﻲ (‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪.۴‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺴﺘﻔﺎﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻜﺎﺑﻝ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻭﻳﺩﺌﻭ )ﺘﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﻨﺷﺪﻩ( ‪ ،‬ﭙﺎﻴﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ‪ COMPONENT VIDEO OUT‬ﺭﺍﺪﺮ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺩﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭙﺧﺶ ﺩﻯ ﻭﻯ ﺩﻯ ﺒﻪ ﭙﺎﻴﺎﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ‬
‫‪ COMPONENT IN‬ﺪﺭ ﺘﻠﻭﻴﺯﻴﻭﻧﺘﺎﻦ ﻤﺘﺻﻝ ﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺴﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻜﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻯ ﺻﻭﺘﻰ ‪ ،‬ﺘﺮﻤﻴﻧﺎﻠﻬﺎﻯ ‪) AUDIO OUT‬ﻗﺮﻣﺯﻭﺴﻓﻴﺪ( ‪ /‬ﺪﺭ ﭘﺷﺖ ﭙﺨﺶ ﻛﻦﻨﺩﻩ ﺪﻯ ﻭﻯ ﺪﻯ ﺭﺍﺑﻪ ﺘﺮﻣﻴﻧﺎﻠﻬﺎﻯ‬
‫‪) AUDIO IN‬ﻗﺭﻤﺯﻭﺴﻔﻴﺩ( ﺘﻠﻭﻴﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻭﺻﻝ ﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﭙﺧﺵ ﻛﻨﻧﺪﻩ ﺩﻯ ﻭﻯ ﺪﻯ ﻭ ﺘﻠﻭﻴﺯﻳﻭﻦ ﺮﺍ ﺮﻭﺸﻦ ﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺯﻴﻨﺸﮕﺮ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻯ ﺍﺑﺮ ﺮﻭﻯ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺪﻭﺭ ﺘﻠﻭﻴﺯﻴﻭﻥ ﻔﺸﺎﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﻴﻧﻛﻪ ﺴﻳﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺠﺯﺀ ﺍﺯ ﭙﺨﺵ ﻛﻨﻧﺩﻩ ﺩﻯ ﻭﻯ ﺪﻯ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻯ ﺻﻓﺤﻪ ﺘﻠﻭﻴﺯﻳﻭﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﻴﺎﻥ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺪﺭ ﻤﻨﻭﻯ ‪ Video Output ، Display Setup‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻯ ‪ I-SCAN/P-SCAN‬ﺘﻨﻇﻴﻡ ﻛﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺫﻛﺭ‬
‫ ”ﺍﺴﻛﻦ ﺘﺪﺮﻳﺟﻰ“ ﭙﻴﺴﺖ ؟‬‫ﺍﺴﻛﻦ ﺘﺪﺮﻴﺟﻰ ﻨﺴﺑﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺮﻭﺵ ﺧﺭﻭﺠﻰ ﺁﻤﻳﺧﺗﻪ ﺪﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺭ ﺧﻃﻭﻄ ﺍﺴﻛﻦ ﺑﻴﺸﺗﺮ ﺪﺍﺭﺪ‪ .‬ﺭﻭﺶ ﺍﺴﻜﻦ ﺘﺪﺭﻳﺠﻰ ﻣﻰ ﺘﻭﺍﻨﺪ ﻛﻳﻔﻴﺖ ﺘﺼﻭﻴﺮ ﺑﻬﺘﺭﻭ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺘﺭﻯ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻨﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .C‬اﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺻﻮﺗﻰ )آﻣﭙﻠﻲ ﻓﺎﻴﺮ ‪ ٢‬ﻛﺎﻧﺎل داﻟﺒﻰ دﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎل ‪ MPEG2‬ﻳﺎآﻣﭙﻠﻰ ﻓﺎﻳﺮ (‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪.۴‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺴﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻜﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻯ ﺻﻭﺗﻰ ‪ ،‬ﺘﺮﻣﻳﻨﺎﻠﻬﺎﻯ ‪) AUDIO OUT‬ﻘﺭﻤﺯ ﻮ ﺴﻔﻳﺩ( ﺪﺮ ﭙﺷﺖ ﭙﺧﺶ ﻛﻧﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﻯ ﻭﻯ ﺪﻯ ﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺘﺭ‬
‫ﻤﻴﻧﺎﻠﻬﺎﻯ ‪) AUDIO IN‬ﻘﺮﻤﺯﻭ ﺴﻔﻳﺪ( ﺁﻤﭘﻠﻰ ﻔﺎﻴﺭ ﻭﺻﻝ ﻛﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺭ ﺍﺰﻜﺎﺒﻝ ﻜﻮﺍﻜﺴﻴﻝ )ﺍﺮﺍﺌﻪ ﻨﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺴﺖ( ﺍﺴﺘﻓﺎﺪﻩ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺘﺭ ﻤﻴﻨﺎﻞ )‪ DIGITAL AUDIO OUT(COAXIAL‬ﺪﺮ ﭘﺸﺖ ﭙﺧﺶ ﻛﻨﻧﺫﻩ ﺪﻯ ﻭﻯ ﺩﻯ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﻤﻴﻨﺎﻞ )‪ DIGITAL AUDIO IN (COAXIAL‬ﺁﻤﭘﻠﻰ ﻔﺎﻴﺭ ﻭﺻﻝ ﻛﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺴﺘﻔﺎﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻜﺎﺑﻝ )ﻫﺎﻯ( ﺴﻴﮔﻧﺎﻞ ﻭﻴﺪﺋﻭ ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻴﺎﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ‪ VIDEO‬ﻴﺎ ‪ COMPONENT OUT‬ﺪﺮ ﭘﺸﺖ ﭙﺧﺶ ﻛﻨﻧﺫﻩ ﺪﻯ ﻭﻯ ﺩﻯ ﺮﺍﺑﻪ ﭙﺎﻴﺎﻨﻪ ‪VIDEO‬‬
‫ﻮ ﻴﺎ ‪ COMPONENT IN‬ﺪﺭ ﺘﻠﻭﻴﺯﻴﻭﻨﺘﺎﻦ ﺑﻄﻭﺭﻳﻜﻪ ﺘﻭﺿﻴﺢ ﺪﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭﺻﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭙﺧﺶ ﻛﻧﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﻯﻭﻯ ﺩﻯ‪ ،‬ﺘﻠﻭﻴﺯﻴﻭﻦ ﻭ ﺁﻤﭙﻠﻰ ﻔﺎﻴﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻛﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﺍﻯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪ external input‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺍﻨﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭﺭﻭﺪﻯ ﺁﭙﻠﻰ ﻔﺎﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻔﺸﺎﺮ ﺪﻫﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺻﺪﺍﻯ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﻦﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﻯ ﻭﻯ ﺪﻯ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺸﻧﻭﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺘﻨﻆﻴﻢ ﺨﺮﻭﺟﻰ ﺁﻤﭙﻠﻰ ﻔﺎﻴﺮ ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎﻯ ﻜﺎﺮﺑﺮ ﺁﻤﭘﻠﻰ ﻓﺎﻴﺮ ﺧﻭﺪ ﺮﺟﻭﻉ ﻛﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫اﺗﺼﺎﻻت‬
‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻳﻚ اﺗﺼﺎل‬
‫‪◄C‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺻﻮﺗۑ‬
‫ﺳﺒﺰ‬
‫‬
‫‪ .A‬اﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻴﺰﻴﻮن )وﻴﺪﺋﻮ(‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻛﻮاﻛﺴﻴﺎل‬
‫آﺑﻰ‬
‫ﺳﻔﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺳﻔﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻗﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺴﺗﻓﺎﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻜﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻯ ﻭﻴﺩﺋﻭﻳﻰ‪/‬ﺻﻭﺘﻰ‪ ،‬ﺘﺮﻤﻴﻨﺎﻠﻬﺎﻯ )ﻗﺮﻣﺯﻭ ﺴﻔﻴﺪ( ‪) / AUDIO OUT‬ﺯﺭﺩ( ‪ VIDEO‬ﺪﺭ ﭘﺸﺖ ﭙﺧﺶ‬
‫ﻛﻧﻨﺩﻩ ﺩﻯ ﻭﻯ ﺪﻯ ﺭﺍﺑﻪ ﺘﺭﻤﻴﻧﺎ ﻠﻬﺎﻯ )ﻗﺭﻣﺰﻭ ﺴﻔﻴﺩ( ‪) / AUDIO IN‬ﺯﺭﺩ( ‪ VIDEO‬ﺘﻠﻭﻴﺯﻴﻭﻦ ﺨﻭﺪ ﻭﺻﻝ ﻛﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﭙﺨﺵ ﻛﻨﻧﺪ ﻩ ﺪﻯ ﻭﻯ ﺪﻯ ﻭﺗﻠﻭﻴﺯﻴﻭﻦ ﺧﻭﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻛﻨﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﮔﺯ ﻴﻨﺷﮕﺮ ﻭﺭﻭﺪﻱ ﺭﺍﺑﺭ ﺭﻭﻯ ﻛﻧﺗﺮﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺮﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺘﻠﻭﻴﺯﻴﻭﻥ ﻔﺷﺎﺮ ﺪﻫﻴﺩﺘﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﻛﻪ ﺴﻴﮔﻨﺎﻞ ﻭﻴﺪﺋﻭ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺤﺶ ﻜﻨﻧﺩﻩ ﺩﻯ ﻭﻯ ﺩﻯ ﺑﺭ ﺭﻭﻯ ﺼﻔﻪ ﺘﻠﻭﻴﺰﻴﻭﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﻴﺎﻦ ﺸﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺳﻔﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻤﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺰﻴﺭ ﻨﻤﻮﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻴﻰ ﺍﺰ ﺍﺘﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﻤﻌﻣﻮﻝ ﺍﺴﺘﻔﺎﻩ ﺸﺩﻩ ﺒﺭﺍﻯ ﺍﺘﺼﺎﻝ ﭙﺧﺵ ﻜﻨﻧﺩﻩ ﺩﻯ ﻭﻯ ﺩﻯ ﺒﻪ ﺘﻠﻮﻴﺰﻴﻮﻦ ﻮ‬
‫ﺴﺎﻴﺭ ﺪﺴﺘﮔﺎﻫﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻨﻣﺎﻴﺶ ﻤﻰ ﺩﻫﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﺰﻮﺼﻝ ﻜﺭﺩﻦ ﭙﺧﺶ ﻜﻨﻧﺩﻩ ﺪﻯ ﻮﻯ ﺩﻯ‬
‫ ﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﺰ ﻮﺼﻞ ﻜﺭﺩﻦ ﻴﺎ ﺠﺩﺍ ﻜﺭﺩﻦ ﻫﺭ ﮔﻮﻨﻪ ﻜﺎﺒﻠﻰ‪ ،‬ﭙﺧﺵ ﻜﻨﻧﺩﻩ ﺩﻯ ﻭﻯ ﺩﻯ ﻮ ﺴﺎﻴﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮔﺎﻫﻬﺎﻯ ﺭﺍ ﺨﺎﻤﻮﺶ ﻜﻧﻴﺩ‪.‬‬‫‪ -‬ﺒﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻤﺎﻯ ﻜﺎﺭﺒﺭ ﺍﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﺿﺎﻔﻰ )ﺍﺰ ﻘﺒﻳﻞ ﺘﻠﻮﻴﻴﻮﻦ( ﻜﻪ ﺒﻪ ﺁﻦ ﻮﺼﻞ ﻤﻰ ﻜﻧﻴﺩ ﺒﺮﺍﻯ ﺍﻄﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺒﻴﺸﺗﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻤﻮﺭﺩ ﺁﻦ ﺍﺠﺰﺍﺀ ﺨﺎﺹ ﺭﺠﻮﻉ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺫﻛﺭ‬
‫ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻜﺎﺑل ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺯﻴﺎﺩﻯ ﺪﺭ ﻨﺯﺩﻴﻛﻴﻄﺫ ﺴﻴﻢ ﺑﺭﻖ ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺩ ﻣﻤﻛﻥ ﺍﺴﺖ ﺴﺭﻭﺻﺪﺍﺘﻭﻠﻳﺪ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬‫ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻰ ﺧﻭﺍﻫﻳﺩ ﺁﻣﭙﻟﻰ ﻓﺎﻴﺮﻯ ﺮﺍ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻜﻧﻴﺩ ‪ ،‬ﻟﻃﻔﺎﹰ ﺑﻪ ﺼﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻞ ﺁﻣﭙﻟﻰ ﻔﺎﻳﺮﻣﺮﺍﺠﻌﻪ ﻜﻧﻳﺪ‪.‬‬‫ ﺸﻣﺎﺮﻩ ﻮ ﻤﻴﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﻤﻜﻥ ﺍﺴﺕ ﺒﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺗﻠﻭﻳﺰﻴﻮﻥ ﺸﻣﺎ ﺗﻓﺎﻮﺕ ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ ‪ .‬ﻟﻓﺎً ﺒﻪ ﺪﻓﺗﺮﭼﻪ ﺮﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎﻯ ﻜﺎﺮﺑﺮ ﺗﻟﻭﻳﺯﻳﻮﻥ ﺧﻭﺩ ﻣﺮﺍﺠﻌﻪ ﻛﻧﻴﺩ‪.‬‬‫ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻳﮏ ﺘﺭﻤﻴﻨﺎﻞ ﻭﺮﻭﺩﻱ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺪﺭ ﺘﻠﻭﻴﺯﻴﻭﻦ ﺷﻣﺎ ﻤﻭﺠﻮﺪ ﺍﺴﺕ ‪،‬ﺁﻥ ﺮﺍﺒﻪ ﺘﺭﻤﻳﻤﻨﺎﻞ )‪) (AUDIO OUT‬ﭽﭗ( )ﺴﻔﻴﺪ( ﺪﺭ ﭙﺧﺶ ﻜﻧﻨﺪﻩ ﺪﻯ ﻮﻯ ﺪﻯ‬‫ﻮﺻﻞ ﻧﻛﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﻟﺒﻰ ﺩﺠﺘﺎل ﻴﺎ ﺁﻣﭙﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺮ‬
‫‬
‫ﻗﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫زرد‬
‫ﻗﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫‪◄B‬‬
‫ﺳﺒﺰ‬
‫آﺑﻰ‬
‫‪◄A‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻳﺪﺋﻮﻳۑ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺻﻮﺗۑ‬
‫ﻛﻠﺒﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻮﻧﻨﺖ‬
‫ﻗﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫زرد‬
‫ﺳﻔﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻗﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮدﻫﺎى اﺻﻠﻰ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﺮدن از ﻋﻤﻜﺮد ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮔﺎﻢ ﭙﺧﺵ ﻴک ‪DVD/VCD/MPEG4‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﺮدن ﻳﻚ دﻳﺴﻚ‬
‫ﻗﺒل ﺍﺯﭙﺧﺶ‬
‫ ﺘﻠﻭﻴﺯﻳﻭﻦ ﺨﻭﺪﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻛﺮﺪﻩ ﻭﺁ ﻧﺭﺍﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻯ ‪) Video Input‬ﻭﺮﻭﺩﻱ ﺼﺤﻴﺢ( ﺑﺮﺭﻭﻯ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩﺩﻭﺭ ﺘﻠﻭﻴﺯﻴﻭﻦ ﺘﻧﻆﻳﻢ ﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬‫‪ -‬ﺍﮔﺮﺴﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺻﻭﺘﻰ ﺧﺎﺮﺟﻰ ﺮﺍﻭﺼﻝ ﻛﺭﺪﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺴﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺻﻭﺘﻰ ﺮﺍ ﺭﻭﺸﻦ ﻜﻧﻴﺪ ﻭﺁﻦ ﺮﺍﺭﻭﻯﻭﺭﻭﺪﻯ ﺻﻭﺘﻰ ﺽﺤﻴﺢ ﺘﻧﻅﻴﻢ ﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‬
‫‬
‫ﺒﻌﺪ ﺍﺯﻭﺼﻝ ﻛﺮﺪﻦ ﭙﺨﺵ ﻜﻧﻨﺪﻩ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻭﻠﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺭﻯ ﻛﻪ ﺪﻛﻣﻪ ‪ POWER‬ﺪﻯ ﻭﻯ ﺪﻯ ﺭﺍ ﻔﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﻰ ﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻴﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺭﻣﻰ ﺷﻭﺪ ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮﻣﻰ ﺧﻭﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺰﺑﺎﻧﻰ ﺭﺍ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪.۴‬‬
‫ﺪﺭ ﺤﻴﻦ ﭙﺨﺵ ‪ ،‬ﺪﻛﻣﻪ ‪ TOOLS‬ﺪﺭ ﻛﻧﺗﺭﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻔﺸﺎﺭ ﺪﻫﻴﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻤﻭﺭﺩ ﺩﻠﺨﻭﺍﻩ‪ ،‬ﺪﻜﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ †‪ π/‬ﺭﺍ ﻔﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ®‪ √/‬ﺭﺍﻔﺷﺎﺮ ﺪﻫﻴﺪ ﺘﺎ ﺘﻧﻆﻴﻢ ﺪﻠﺧﻭ ﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺒﺭﺍﻯ ﻤﺤﻭ ﻛﺮﺩﻦ ﺻﻓﺤﻪ ﺗﻧﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﺭﺩﻦ ‪ ،‬دﻛﻤﮫ ‪ TOOLS‬را دوﺑﺎره ﻓﺸﺎر دھﯿﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮدهﺎﯼ هﻨﮕﺎم اﺳﺘﻔﺎدﻩ از ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮد ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‪ ،‬در ﺟﺪول زﻳﺮ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ اﻧﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺒﺭﺍﻯ ﺪﺴﺗﺭﺴﻰ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻠﺧﻭﺍﻩ ﺪﺮ ﺯﻤﺎﻨﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻳک ﻋﻧﻮﺍﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻴﺴک ﻤﻭﺠﻭﺪ ﺒﺎﺷﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺒﺭﺍﻯ ﻣﺛﺎﻞ ‪،‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻴﺸﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻴک ﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻯﻮﻯﺩﻯ ﻤﻭﺠﻭﺪ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪،‬ﻫﺭ ﻓﻴﻟﻢ ﺸﻧﺎﺴﺎﻴﻰ ﻭﺍﻫﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻧﻴﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻣﻪ †‪ ،π/‬ﺴﭙﺲ ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺩ‪) ..‬ﺍﻴﻦ ﺼﻔﺤﻪ ﻓﻗﻄ ﺰﻤﺎﻧﻰ ﻆﺎﻫﺭﻣﻰ ﺷﻭﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺸﻤﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺍﻭﻠﻴﻥ ﺑﺎﺮ ﭘﺧﺶ ﻜﻨﻧﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺭﺍﻭﺻﻝ ﻛﺭﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪( .‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺯﺑﺎﻦ ﺼﻔﺤﻪ ﺘﻧﻇﻴﻢ ﺘﻌﻳﻴﻦ ﻨﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺸﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺘﻨﻇﻴﻤﺎﺖ ﻣﻤﻛﻦﺍﺴﺖ ﻫﺭ ﺑﺎﺮ ﻛﻪ ﺪﺴﺘﮔﺎﻩ ﺮﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﺖ ﻴﺎ ﺨﺎﻤﻭﺶ ﻛﻧﻴﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺘﻐﻳﻴﺮﻜﻧﻨﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺑﺭﺍﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻤﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺸﻭﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻰ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺗﺭ ﺪﻴﺴﻜﻬﺎﻯ ﺩﻯﻭﻯﺪﻯ ﺑﺼﻭﺮﺕ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺿﺒﻃﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺒﺗﻮﻨﻴﺩ ﺑﺴﺭﻋﺕ ﻗﺴﻣﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻭﻃﻪ ﺭﺍ ﭙﻴﺩﺍ ﻛﻨﻴﺩ )ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺗﺭﺍﻛﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺴﻰ ﺩﻯ ﺼﻮﺗﻰ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺴﺘﮔﺎﻩ ﺑﻤﺩﺖ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺭ ﺍﺯ ‪ ۵‬ﺜﺎﻧﻳﻪ ﺪﺮ ﺤﺎﻠﻳﻛﻪ ﺪﻴﺴﻛﻰ ﺪﺭ ﺩﺴﺗﮔﺎﻩ ﻧﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺘﻐﻳﻴﺮ ﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺴﭙﺲ ﭙﻧﺠﺮﻩ ‪ SELECT MENU LANGUAGE‬ﺪﻭﺑﺎﺮﻩ ﻇﺎﻫﺭ ﻣﻰ‬
‫ﺍﺠﺎﺯﻩ ﭙﺧﺶ ﻔﻴﻟﻢ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻣﺎﻦ ﺩﻠﺧﻭﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻤﻰ ﺪﻫﺩ‪ .‬ﺸﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﻴﺩ ﺯﻤﺎﻦ ﺸﺭﻭﻉﺭ ﺍﺒﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻦ ﻤﺭﺠﻊ ﻮﺭﺍﺪ ﻛﻨﻴﺩ‪ .‬ﻋﻤﻟﻛﺮﺪ ﺟﺴﺗﺠﻭﻯ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺪﺭ ﺑﻌﺿﻰ‬
‫ﺩﻴﺴﻛﻬﺎ ﻛﺎﺮ ﻧﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺨﻭﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﺴﺘﻔﺎﺪﻩ ﻛﻧﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻨﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻜﺭﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺸﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻘﺘﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻨﺘﺧﺎﺏ ﺯﺒﺎﻦ ﻤﻧﻭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﻛﺭﺪﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻤﻰ ﺘﻭﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺁﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻔﺸﺎﺭ ﺪﺍﺪﻦ ﺪﻛﻤﻪ ||® ﺪﺭ ﭙﺎﻧﻝ ﺠﻠﻭﻯ‬
‫ﺸﻭﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺪﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻤﻰ ﺘﻭﺍﻨﻳﺪ ﺯﺑﺎﻦ ﺪﻠﺨﻭ ﺍﻩ ﺨﻭﺪ ﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻨﺷﺎﻧﻰ ﻛﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺯﺑﺎﻦ ﺷﻴﺎﺭ ﺼﻭﺗﻰ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﺠﻭﻉ ﺸﻮﺪ ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻴﻦ ﻤﺛﺎﻞ‪،‬ﺻﺪﺍﻯ ﺗﺭﺍک ﺼﻭﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺰﺑﺎﻦ ﺍﻧﮔﻠﻴﺴﻰ ﺑﺻﻭﺭﺕ ‪ ۵/١‬ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻞ ﻀﺑﻁ ﻣﻰ ﺸﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻴک ﺩﻴﺴک ﺩﻯ ﻮﻯ ﺩﻯ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻭﺍﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻫﺸﺕ ﺗﺭﺍک ﺼﻮﺗﻰ ﻣﺧﺗﻟﻑ ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪.‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﺮدن از ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮدﻫﺎى ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮوﭘﺰش‬
‫ﺪﺭ ﺤﻴﻦ ﭙﺨﺵ ‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺴﺮﻋﺖ ﺪﺭ ﻤﻳﺎﻦ ﻴک ﻓﺻﻞ ﻴﺎ ﺗﺭﺍک ﺟﺴﺘﺟﻭ ﻛﻧﻴﺩ ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻴﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻛﺭﺪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭙﺮﺶ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻨﺗﺨﺎﺏ ﺑﻌﺪﻯ ﺍﺴﺘﻔﺎﺪﻩ ﻜﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺠﺴﺘﺤﻮ ﻜﺭﺩﻦﺩﺭ ﻤﻳﺎﻦ ﻳک ﻔﺼﻝ ﻴﺎﺘﺭﺍک‬
‫ﺪﺭ ﺤﻴﻦ ﭙﺨﺵ ‪ ،‬ﺪﻜﻣﻪ ) ‪ K‬ﻴﺎ ‪ SEARCH ( k‬ﺭﺍ ﺪﺭ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺮ ﺑﺭﺍﻯ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ‪ ١‬ﺜﺎﻨﻴﻪ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪2X, 4X, 8X, 16X, 32X‬‬
‫‪DVD‬‬
‫‪2X, 4X, 8X, 16X, 32X‬‬
‫‪CD‬‬
‫‪4X, 8X‬‬
‫‪VCD‬‬
‫ﺗﺫﻛﺮ‬
‫ ﺴﺭﻋﺖ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﮔﺫﺍﺭﻯ ﺸﺩﻩ ﺪﺭ ﺍﻴﻦ ﻋﻣﻠﻜﺭﺩ ﻣﻤﻛﻥ ﺍﺴﺕ ﺑﺎ ﺴﺮﻋﺖ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻰ ﭙﺧﺶ ﺘﻔﺎﻭﺖ‬‫ﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻫﻴﭻ ﺻﺪﺍﻴﻰﺪﺭ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺤﺎﻠﺖ ﺟﺴﺘﺟﻭ ﺑﮔﻭﺶ ﻨﺨﻭ ﺍﻫﺩ ﺭﺴﻴﺪ )ﺑﺠﺯ ﺳﻰ ﺪﻯ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎﻯ ﺯﻴﺮ ﻨﻭﻴﺲ ﻣﻭﺠﻭﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻴﺴک ﺍﺷﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻧﺩ ‪ .‬ﺸﻤﺎ ﻗﺎﺪﺭ ﺧﻭﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﻭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺯﺒﺎﻧﻬﺎﻯ ﺯﻴﺭ ﻧﻭﻳﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﻛﻧﻴﺪ ﻴﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺘﺮﺠﻴﺢ ﻤﻰ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ‪،‬ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﻯ ﺻﻓﺣﻪ ﺧﺎﻤﻭﺶ ﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻴک ﺩﻴﺴک ﺪﻯﻮﻯﺪﻯ ﻤﻰ ﺗﻭﺍﻨﺪ ﺘﺎ ‪ ٣٢‬ﺯﺒﺎﻦ ﺯﻴﺭ ﻧﻭﻴﺮ ﻧﻭﻴﺲ ﻤﺨﺗﻟﻒ ﺪﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺸﺎﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪EZ‬‬
‫ﻘﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ‪ EZ View‬ﻨﺴﺑﺖ ﺑﺯﺮ ﮔﻨﻤﺎﻴﻰ ﺘﺻﻭﻴﺮﺭﺍﻣﻰ ﺗﻭﺍﻦ ﺑﺴﺎﺪﮔﻰ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺰﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺮای ﻓﻌﺎل ﮐﺮدن ﻗﺎﺑﻠﯿﺖ ﺑﺰرﮔﻨﻤﺎﺋﯽ دﮐﻤﮫ را ﻓﺸﺎر دھﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺠﻬﺖ ﺴﺘﺮﺴﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻔﺎﺑﻠﻳﺖ ‪ Angle‬ﺩﻠﺨﻭﺍﻩ‬
‫ﻘﺎﺑﻠﻳﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﺍﻭﻴﻪ ﺑﻳﻧﻲ ﺷﺪﻩﺩ ﺭﺑﺭﺧﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺪﻴﺴﻙ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﺯﻫﺮ ﺘﺻﻭﻴﺮ ﻣﻤﻛﻦ ﺑﻴﺷﺘﺮ ﺍﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﺮدن از ﻣﻨﻮى دﻳﺴﻚ وﻋﻨﻮان‬
‫ﭘﺮش ﻛﺮدن از ﺗﺮاﻛﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺪﺭ ﺤﻴﻦ ﭙﺨﺵ ‪ ،‬ﺪﻛﻣﻪ ‪ K|) SKIP‬ﻴﺎ ‪ (|k‬ﺭﺍ ﻔﺸﺎﺭ ﺪﻫﻴﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻫﻨﮔﺎﻢ ﭙﺧﺵ ﻴک ﺩﻯ ﻭﻯ ﺩﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺭ ﺩﻜﻤﻪ )|‪ SKIP (K‬ﺭﺍ ﻔﺸﺎﺮ ﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺪﺴﺘﮔﺎﻩ ﺒﻪ ﻔﺻﻞ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺭ ﺩﻜﻤﻪ )‪ SKIP (|k‬ﺭﺍ ﻔﺸﺎﺭ ﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪،‬‬‫ﺩﺴﺘﮔﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺑﺘﺩﺍﻯ ﻔﺻﻞ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻤﻰ ﺭﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﻴک ﻔﺸﺎﺮ ﻴﮔﺮ ﺩﺴﺘﮔﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻯ ﻔﺼﻞ ﻘﺑﻞ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺭﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻫﻨﮔﺎﻢ ﭙﺧﺶ ‪ VCD‬ﻳﺎ ﻳک ﺴﻰ ﺩﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺭ ﺪﻜﻤﻪ )|‪ SKIP (K‬ﺭﺍ ﻔﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪،‬ﺩﺴﺘﮔﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺘﺭﺍک ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﻰ ﺭﻭﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺭ ﺪﻛﻤﻪ )‪ SKIP (|k‬ﺭﺍ ﻔﺷﺎﺮ‬‫ﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺴﺘﮔﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻯ ﺗﺭﺍک ﻤﻰ ﺭﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﻴک ﻔﺷﺎﺭ ﺪﻴﮔﺭ ﺪﺴﺘﮔﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺑﺘﺩﺍﻯ ﺘﺭﺍک ﻘﺒﻝ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺭﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺪﺭﺤﻴﻦ ﭙﺨﺶ ﺴﻰ ﺩﻯ ﻭﻴﺪ ﺋﻭﻴﻰ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺘﺮﺍک ﺑﻳﺶ ﺍﺯ ‪ ۵‬ﺪﻘﻴﻘﻪ ﺑﺎﺸﺪﻭ ﺸﻤﺎ ﺪﻛﻤﻪ |‪ K‬ﺭﺍ ﻔﺷﺎﺭ ﺪﻫﻴﺩ‪ ،‬ﺪﺴﺗﮔﺎ ﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ‪ ۵‬ﺪﻘﻴﻘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺠﻠﻭ ﻣﻰ ﺭﻭﺪ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﮔﺭ ﺪﻛﻤﻪ ‪ |k‬ﺭﺍ ﻔﺸﺎﺭ ﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺪﺴﺘﮔﺎ ﻩ ‪ ۵‬ﺩﻘﻴﻘﻪ ﺒﻪ ﻋﻘﺏ ﻣﻰ ﺭﻭﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺪﺭ ﺤﻴﻦ ﭙﺨﺵ ﻳک ﺩﻴﺴک ﺪﻯ ﻭﻯ ﺪﻯ ‪ ،‬ﺪﻛﻣﻪ ‪ Title Menu/Disc Menu‬ﺪﺭ ﻛﻧﺗﺭﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻔﺸﺎﺭ ﺪﻫﻴﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺫﻛﺮ‬
‫ ﺑﺎﺘﻭﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺪﻳﺴک ‪ Title Menu / Disc Menu ،‬ﻣﻤﻛﻥ ﺍﺴﺖ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﻛﻧﺪ‪.‬‬‫ ﺸﻣﺎ ﻫﻤﭼﻧﻴﻦ ﻣﻰ ﺘﻭﺍﻨﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ‪ Disc Menu‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺴﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺪﻛﻤﻪ ‪ DISC MENU‬ﺪﺭ ﻜﻨﺘﺮﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻩ ﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﺴﺘﻔﺎﺪﻩ ﻛﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬‫‪ Title Menu -‬ﻓﻘﻃ ﺪﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻰ ﻨﻣﺎﻴﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺨﻭﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪﻛﻪ ﺣﺩﺍﻗﻞﺪﻭ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻦ ﺭﺪ ﺩﻴﺴک ﺠﻭﺩ ﺩﺍﺸﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺸﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﻜﺮارى‬
‫ﺘﺭﺍک ‪،‬ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻦ‪ ،‬ﻔﻌﻠﻰ‪ ،‬ﻴک ﻘﺴﻤﺖ ﺍﻨﺗﺨﺎﺏ ﺸﺪﻩ )‪ ،(A-B‬ﻴﺎﺘﻤﺎﻢ ﺪﻴﺴک ﺭﺍ ﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﭘﺨﺶدىوىدى‪/‬ﺳۑدى وﻴﺪﺋﻮﻴﻰ )‪(DVD/VCD‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺩﻜﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ‪ REPEAT‬ﺩﺭﻜﻨﺘﺭﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺮﺍﻩ ﺩﻮﺮ ﺮﺍ ﻔﺴﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺒﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻐﻳﻴﺮ ﺤﺎﻟﺕ ﭙﺧﺶ‪ ،‬ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ †‪ π/‬ﺭﺍﻓﺷﺎﺮ ﺪﻫﻴﺩ‪ .‬ﺪﻯ ﻭﻯ ﺪﻯ ﭙﺧﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻔﺻﻝ ﻴﺎ ﻋﻨﻭﺍﻦ ﺍﻨﺟﺎﻢ ﻣﻰ ﺪﻫﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Off -‬ﺨﺎﻤﻮﺵ( ‪.‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫ ‪) Title‬ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ( ‪ :‬ﻋﻨﻭﺍﻧﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺪﺮ ﺤﺎﻞ ﭙﺧﺶ ﺍﺴﺖ ﺮﺍ ﺘﻜﺭﺍﺭﻣﻰ ﻛﻧﺪ‪.‬‬‫ ‪) Chapter‬ﻔﺼﻝ( ‪ :‬ﻔﺻﻟﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺪﺮ ﺤﺎﻞ ﭙﺧﺶ ﺍﺴﺖ ﺮﺍﺘﻜﺭﺍﺭﻣﻰ ﻛﻧﺪ‪.‬‬‫‪) REPEAT A-B -‬ﺘﮑﺭﺍﺭ ‪(A-B‬‬
‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﺮدن زﻧﺎن ﺻﺪا‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺘﻭﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻴک ﺯﻨﺎﻥ ﺻﺪﺍﻯ ﺪﻠﺨﻭﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺴﺭﻋﺖ ﻭ ﺒﺴﺎﺩﮔﻰ ﺒﺎ ﺍﺴﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺰ ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ‪ AUDIO‬ﺍﻨﺘﺧﺎﺏ ﻜﻨﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎدهﻛﺮدن از ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد ‪A-B REPEAT‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺪﺮ ﺣﻴﻥ ﭙﺧﺵ‪ ،‬ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ‪ REPEAT A-B‬ﺒﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻧﺗﺮﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺪﻭﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺮ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺩﻜﻤﻪ ‪ REPEAT A-B‬ﺭﺍﺪﺭ ﻤﺤﻠﻰ ﻜﻪ ﻣﻰ ﺨﻭﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﭙﺧﺵ ﺘﻛﺮ ﺍﺭﻯ )‪ (A‬ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﺷﻭﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻔﺷﺎﺭ ﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺩﻜﻤﻪ ‪ REPEAT A-B‬ﺭﺍﺪﺭ ﻨﻘﻄﻪ ﺍﻯ ﻜﻪ ﻣﻰ ﺨﻭﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﭙﺧﺵ ﺘﻛﺮ ﺍﺭﻯ )‪ (B‬ﻣﺘﻭﻘﻒ ﺷﻭﺪ‪ ،‬ﻔﺷﺎﺭ ﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪,‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﺎزﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻋﺎدﯼ‪ ،‬دﮐﻤﻪ ‪ REPEAT A-B‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دهﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ‪ ) Repeat : Off‬ﺗﮑﺮار ‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮش( را ﻧﺸﺎن دﻫﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺫﻛﺮ‬
‫ ‪ REPEAT A-B‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ اﻣﮑﺎن ﻣﯽ دﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ )‪ (B‬را دﻗﻴﻘﺎً ﺑﻌﺪ از ﻧﻘﻄﻪ )‪ (A‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬‫‪ -‬ﺑﺎ ﺘﻭﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺪﻴﺴک ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻠﻛﺭﺪ ﺘﻛﺮﺍﺮ ﻣﻤﻛﻦ ﺍﺴﺖ ﻛﺎﺮ ﻨﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ آﻫﺴﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻴﻥ ﻭﻴﮋﮔﻰ ﺑﻪ ﺸﻤﺎ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻤﻰ ﺪﻫﺪ ﺘﺎ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻭﺮﺯﺷﻰ‪ ،‬ﺭﻘﺹ‪ ،‬ﺴﺎﺯﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ ﭙﺨﺵ ﺸﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺭﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻃﻭﺮ ﺁﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺘﻛﺮﺍﺭ ﻛﻧﻴﺩ‪ ،‬ﺘﺎ ﺑﺘﻭﺍﻨﻴﺩ ﺁﻨﺎﻦ‬
‫ﺮﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻨﺯﺩﻴک ﺑﺮﺭﺴﻰ ﻜﻨﻴﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﭘﺨﺶ دىوىدى‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺩﺭ ﺤﻳﻦ ﭙﺧﺵ‪ ،‬ﺩﻜﻤﻪ )||®( ‪ PLAY‬ﺮﺍ ﻔﺴﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺪﻜﻣﻪ )‪ SEARCH (k/K‬ﺭﺍ ﻔﺴﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻮ ﻨﮔﺎﻩ ﺩﺭﻴﺩ ﻴﺎ ﺴﺭﻋﺖ ﭙﺨﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻤﻴﺎﻦ‪ ١/١۶،١/٨،١/۴،١/٢‬ﺴﺭﻋﺖ ﻤﻌﻤﻭﻠﻰ ﺭﺍﺪﺮ ﺤﻳﻦ ﺤﺎﻠﺖ ‪PAUSE‬‬
‫ﺍﻨﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻜﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬ﺍﮔﺭ ﻤﻰ ﺨﻭ ﺍﻫﻳﺩ ﭙﺧﺵ ﻋﺎﺩﻯ ﺒﺎﺸﺩ ﺪﻜﻣﻪ ‪ PLAY‬ﺮﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺪﻫﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮدﻫﺎى ﭘﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻢ ﻛﺮدن درﺟﻪ ﺑﺰرﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﻰ )ﻧﻤﺎى ‪(EZ‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاى ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﺎ اﺷﺘﻔﺎده ازدرﺟﻪ ﺑﺰرﮔﻨﻤﺎﻴﻰ )دى وى دى(‬
‫ﺑﺮاى دﻴﺴﻬﺎى داراى درﺟﻪ ﺑﺰر ﮔﻨﻤﺎﻴﻰ ‪١۶ : ٩‬‬
‫ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻋﺮﻴﺾ‬‫ اﻧﺪازه ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬‫ اﻧﺪازه زوم‬‫ﺑﺮاى دﻴﺴﻬﺎى داراى درﺟﻪ ﺑﺰر ﮔﻨﻤﺎﻴﻰ ‪۴:٣‬‬
‫ ﻋﺮض ﻋﺎدى‬‫ اﻧﺪازه ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬‫ اﻧﺪازه زوم‬‫ اﻧﺪازه ﻋﻤﻮدى‬‫ﺗﺫﻛﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻴﻦ ﻋﻣﻠﻛﻦ ﺍﺴﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﺴﺎﺲ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺪﻴﺴک ﺑﻄﻭﺮ ﺑﻄﻭﺮ ﻤﺗﻓﺎﻭﺖ ﻋﻤﻝ ﻛﻧﺪ‬
‫‬
‫ﺗﺫﻛﺮ‬
‫ ﺍﻴﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎﻳﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺭﻭﻯ ﺪﻴﺴک ﺭﻣﺰﮔﺫﺍﺭﻯ ﺴﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺴﺘﮔﻰ ﺪﺍﺮﺪ ﻭ ﻤﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﻜﺎﺮ ﻨﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬‫‪ -‬ﻴک ﺪﻴﺴک ﺩﻯ ﻭﻯ ﺪﻯ ﻣﻰ ﺘﻭﺍﻧﺪ ﺘﺎ ﺤﺩﺍﻜﺜﺮ ‪ ٨‬ﺰﺑﺎﻦ ﺻﻭﺗﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﻤﻝ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﺮدن زﻧﺎن زﺮ ﻧﻮﻳﺲ‬
‫ﺸﻤﺎ ﻣﻰ ﺘﻭﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺴﺭﻋﺖ ﻭ ﺠﺴﺎﺪﮔﻴﺰﺑﺎﻦ ﺯﻴﺮ ﻧﻭﻴﺲ ﺪﻠﺨﻭﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺴﺗﻔﺎﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺪﻛﻤﻪ ‪ SUBTITLE‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از دﻛﻤﺪ )‪(DVD/MPEG) SUBTITLE (π‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺩﺭ ﺤﻳﻦ ﭙﺧﺵ‪ ،‬ﺪﻜﻣﻪ )‪ SUBTITLE (π‬ﺭﺍﻔﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺮاﯼ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ زﺑﺎن‪ ،‬دﮐﻤﻪ )‪ SUBTITLE (π‬ﻳﺎ†‪ π/‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺮ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﺮ ﺑﺎر ﮐﻪ دﮐﻤﻪ )‪ SUBTITLE (π‬ﻳﺎ†‪ π/‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬زﺑﺎن ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺒﺭﺍﻯ ﭙﺎک ﻛﺮﺩﻦ ﺸﻤﺎﻴﻞ ‪ SUBTITLE‬ﺪﻛﻤﻪ ‪ RETURN‬ﺭﺍﻔﺷﺎﺭ ﺪﻫﻴﺩ‬
‫ﺗﺫﻛﺮ‬
‫ ﺰﻴﺮﻨﻭﻴﺲ ﻫﻨﮔﺎﻤﻰ ﻜﻪ ﺪﻜﻤﻪ ﺑﻁﻭﺭ ﻤﻜﺭﺮ ﻔﺷﺎﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻭﺪ ﺗﻐﻳﻴﺮﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬‫ ﺒﺴﺗﮔﻰ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻭﻉ ﻯﺪ ﻭﻯ ﺩﻯ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺴﺗﻰ ﻜﻪ ﺯﻴﺭﻧﻭﻴﺲ ﻤﻭﺭﺪ ﻧﻈﺭ ﺭﺍﺩﺭ ‪) Disc Menu‬ﻣﻧﻮﻯ ﺩﻴﺴک( ﺗﻐﻳﻴﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﻫﻛﻤﻪ ‪ DISC MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺮ ﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬‫ ﺍﻴﻥ ﻋﻣﻠﻜﺭﺪ ﺒﻪ ﺯﻴﺮﻨﻮﻴﺲ ﻛﻪ ﺭﻯﺪﻯ ﺪﻴﺴک ﺭﻣﺯﻤﮔﺬﺍﺮﻯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺴﺗﮔﻰ ﺪﺍﺭﺪ ﻮ ﻤﻣﻛﻦ ﺍﺴﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﻰ ﺪﻯ ﻮﻯ ﺪﻯ ﻫﺎ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻛﻧﺪ‪.‬‬‫‪ -‬ﻴک ﺩﻴﺴک ﺩﻯ ﻮﻯ ﺪﻯ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺣﺪ ﺍﻜﺛﺭ ﺩﺍﺮﺍﻯ ‪٣٢‬ﺰﺑﺎﻥ ﺯﻴﺭﻧﻭﻴﺲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﺮ دادن زاوﻳﻪ دورﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻫﻧﻜﺎﻤﻰ ﻜﻪ ﺩﻯ ﻭﻯ ﺩﻯ ﺤﺎﻮﻯ ﺯﻭﺍﻴﺎﻯ ﺩﻴﺪ ﻣﺧﺗﻟﻒ ﺍﺰ ﻴک ﺼﺤﻧﻪ ﺨﺎﺹ ﺍﺴﺕ‪ ،‬ﻤﻰ ﺘﻭﺍﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻟﻜﺭﺪ ‪ ANGLE‬ﺍﺴﺘﻓﺎﺪﻩ ﻛﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺪﺮ ﺣﻴﻥ ﭙﺧﺵ‪ ،‬ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ‪ TOOLS‬ﺒﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻧﺗﺮﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺪﻭﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺮ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ †‪ π/‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍﻯ ﺍﻨﺗﺧﺎﺏ ‪ . EZ‬ﻫﺮ ﺑﺎر ﮐﻪ دﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ ®‪ √/‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دهﻴﺪ‪ ،‬اﻧﺪازﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮاﯼ اﻃﻼع‬
‫از ﮔﺮاﻓﻴﮏ اﻧﺪازﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ و ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ اﻧﺪازﻩ ﺁن‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺳﺘﻮن ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺧﺎرج ﺷﺪن از ﻧﻤﺎﯼ ‪ ، EZ‬دﮐﻤﻪ ‪ RETURN‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دهﻴﺪ‬
‫اﮔﺮﺷﻤﺎ از ﺗﻠﻮﻴﺰﻴﻮن ‪ ١۶:٩‬اﺳﺘﻔﺎدﻩ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﺮدن از دﻛﻤﺪ )√( ‪(DVD/VCD/MPEG) AUDIO‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺩﺭ ﺤﻳﻦ ﭙﺧﺵ‪ ،‬ﺪﻜﻣﻪ )√( ‪ AUDIO‬ﺭﺍ ﻔﺷﺎﺮ ﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر دادن دﮐﻤﻪ )√( ‪ AUDIO‬ﻳﺎ †‪ π/‬زﺑﺎن ﺻﺪا را ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ دهﻴﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺯﺑﺎﻦ ﺻﻬﺘﻰ ﺑﺎ ﺤﺭﻭﻒ ﺍﺧﺘﺻﺎﺭﻯ ﻧﺸﺎﻦ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺴﺖ‪.‬‬‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺭﺍﻯ ﭙﺎک ﻛﺮﺪﻥ ﺷﻤﺎﻴﻞ ‪ ،AUDIO‬ﺪﻛﻤﻪ ‪ RETURN‬ﺭﺍ ﻔﺷﺎﺭﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫اﮔﺮ از ﺗﻠﻮﻴﺰﻴﻮن ‪ ۴:٣‬اﺳﺘﻔﺎدﻩ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺮاى دﻴﺴﻛﻬﺎى داراى درﺟﻪ ﺑﺰر ﮔﻨﻤﺎﻴﻰ ‪١۶ : ٩‬‬
‫ ﺻﻨﺪوق ﭘﺴﺖ ‪۴:٣‬‬‫ ﭙﻦ‪-‬اﺳﻜﻦ ‪۴:٣‬‬‫ اﻧﺪازه ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬‫ اﻧﺪازه زوم‬‫ﺑﺮاى دﻴﺴﻬﺎى داراى درﺟﻪ ﺑﺰر ﮔﻨﻤﺎﻴﻰ ‪۴:٣‬‬
‫ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻋﺎدى‬‫ اﻧﺪازه ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬‫‪ -‬اﻧﺪازه زوم‬
‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ازدﻛﻤﺪ ‪(DVD) ANGLE‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺭ ﺪﻴﺴک ﺣﺎﻮﻯ ﺯﻮﺍﻴﺎﻱ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻓﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪ ANGLE ،‬ﺭﻮﻯ ﺻﻓﺣﻪ ﻅﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻰ ﺸﻭﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺪﺮ ﺣﻴﻥ ﭙﺧﺵ‪ ،‬ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ‪ TOOLS‬ﺒﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻧﺗﺮﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺪﻭﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺮ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ®‪ √/‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍﻯ ﺍﻨﺗﺧﺎﺏ ‪ ANGLE‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺪﺍﺩﻩ ‪ ،‬ﺴﭙﺱ ﺪﻜﻤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻓﺷﺎﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ †‪ π/‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍﻯ ﺍﻨﺗﺧﺎﺏ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﺮدن از ﻋﻤﻜﺮد ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﮔﺬارى‬
‫ﺍﻴﻦ ﻭﻴژﮔﻰ ﺒﻪ ﺸﻤﺎ ﺍﺠﺎﺯﻩ ﻤﻰ ﺪﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺒﺧﺷﻰ ﺍﺯ ﻴک ﺪﻯ ﻮﻯ ﺪﻯ ﻴﺎ ﺴﻰ ﺩﻯ ﻭﻴﺪﺋﻮﻯ )ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ‪ (Menu Off‬ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻨﻪ ﮔﺬﺭﻯ ﻜﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺒﺘﻭﺍﻧﻴﺩ‬
‫ﺒﺴﺭﻋﺕ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺪﺮ ﺁﻴﻧﺩﻩ ﭙﻴﺪﺍ ﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ازﻋﻤﻜﺮد ‪(DVD/VCD) Bookmark‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺪﺮ ﺣﻴﻥ ﭙﺧﺵ‪ ،‬ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ‪ MARKER‬ﺒﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻧﺗﺮﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺪﻭﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺮ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻫﻨﮔﺎﻣﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﺣﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻴﻰ ﻛﻪ ﻤﻰ ﺧﻭﺍﻫﺍﻴﺩ ﻋﻼﺗﮔﺫﺍﺮﻯ ﺷﻭﻧﺪ ﺭﺴﻴﺪﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺪﻜﻣﻪ †‪ π/‬ﻳﺎ ®‪ ، √/‬ﺴﭙﺲ ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ‪ MARKER‬ﺮﺍ ﺍﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺎ ‪ ١٢‬ﺼﺣﻨﻪ ﺭﺍﻤﻰ ﺗﻭﺍﻦ ﺪﺭﻫﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺮﻋﻼﻤﺕ ﮔﺫﺍﺭﻯ ﻧﻤﻭﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺫﻛﺮ‬
‫‪ -‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻭﺠﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺪﻴﺴک ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻟﻜﺭﺪ ‪ Bookmark‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﺎﺮ ﻨﻛﻧﺪ‬
‫ﻓﺮاﺧﻮاﻧﻰ ﻳﻚ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﮔﺬاري ﺷﺪه‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ‪MP3/WMA/CD Audio‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺪﺮ ﺣﻴﻥ ﭙﺧﺵ‪ ،‬ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ‪ MARKER‬ﺒﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻧﺗﺮﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺪﻭﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺮ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ †‪ π/‬ﻳﺎ ®‪ √/‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍﻯ ﺍﻨﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﻴک ﺻﺣﻨﻪ ﻋﻼﻤﺖ ﮔﺬﺍﺮﻯ ﺷﺩﻩ ﻓﺷﺎﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺩﻛﻣﻪ )||®( ‪ PLAY‬ﺮﺍ ﺒﺭﺍﻯ ﭙﺮﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺻﺣﻨﻪ ﻋﻼﻤﺖ ﮔﺬﺍﺮﻯ ﺷﺩﻩ ﻓﺷﺎﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺴﻴﻨﻰ ﺪﻴﺴک ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻜﻨﻴﺩ‪ .‬ﺪﻴﺴک ﺭﺍ ﺭﻮﻯ ﺴﻴﻧﻰ ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺴﻴﻨﻰ ﺭﺍ ﺒﺑﻨﺩﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ®‪ √/‬ﺭﺍﺒﺭﺍﻯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻨﻮﯼ ‪) Music‬ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ( ﻔﺸﺎﺮ ﺪﺍﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺴﭙﺲ ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺩ‪ .‬ﺪﻜﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ †‪π/‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺒﺭﺍﻯ ﺍﻨﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﻴک ﻓﺎﻴﻞ ﺁﻫﻨگ ﻓﺸﺎﺮ ﺪﻫﻴﺩ‪ ،‬ﺴﭙﺲ ‪ ENTER‬ﺮﺍﺒﺭﺍﻯ ﺸﺭﻭﻉ ﭙﺧﺵ ﻓﺎﻴﻝ ﺁﻫﻧﮓ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺪﻫﻳﺩ‬
‫ﭘﺎكﻛﺮدنﻳﻚ ‪Bookmark‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﻜﺮارى‪/‬ﺗﺼﺎدﻓﻰ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺪﺮ ﺣﻴﻥ ﭙﺧﺵ‪ ،‬ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ‪ MARKER‬ﺒﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻧﺗﺮﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺪﻭﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺮ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ †‪ π/‬ﻳﺎ ®‪ √/‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍﻯ ﺍﻨﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﺸﻣﺎﺭﻩ ﻧﺸﺎﻨﻪ ﮔﺬﺍﺮﻯ ﻛﻪ ﻤﻰ ﺧﻭﺍﻫﻴﺩ ﺤﺫﻑ ﺷﺩﻩ ‪ ،‬ﻓﺷﺎ ﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺮﺍ ﺒﺭﺍﻯ ﺣﺫﻑ ﻴک ﺷﻣﺎﺮﻩ ﻋﻼﻤﺖ ﮔﺬﺍﺮﻯ ﻓﺷﺎﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺪﻜﻣﻪ ‪ REPEAT‬ﺭﺍﺑﺭﺍﻯ ﺗﻐﻳﻴﺮ ﺤﺎﻠﺕ ﭼﺧﺶ ﻔﺷﺎﺭ ﺪﻫﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﭽﻬﺎﺮ ﺣﺎﻠﺕ ﻮﺠﻭﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺪ ‪) Off :‬ﺨﺎﻤﻮﺵ( ‪) Track ،‬ﺘﺮﺍﻙ( ‪) Folder ،‬ﻔﻮﻟﺩﺮ(‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫)ﺍﺘﻔﺎﻘﻰ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻭ ‪Random‬‬
‫ ‪) Off‬ﺨﺎﻤﻮﺵ( ) ( ‪ :‬ﭽﺧﺶ ﻋﺎﺩﻯ‬‫‪1‬‬
‫)ﺘﺮﺍﻙ( ) ‪ : ( 1‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺁﻫﻨگ ﻔﻌﻠﻰ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻜﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﻰ ﻜﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪Track‬‬‫ ‪) Folder‬ﻔﻮﻟﺩﺮ( ) ( ‪ :‬ﻓﺎﻴﻟﻬﺎﻯ ﺁﻫﻨﮔﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺪﺍﺭﺍﻯ ﭙﺴﻮﻨﺪ ﻣﺷﺎﺒﻪ ﺪﺭ ﭙﻮﺸﻪ ﻓﻌﻟﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻧﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻰ ﻜﻨﺩ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬
‫(‪ :‬ﻓﺎﻴﻠﻬﺎﻯ ﺁﻫﻧﮔﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺮﺍﻯ ﭙﺴﻭﻧﺪ ﻤﺸﺎﺒﻪ ﺒﺎﺸﻨﺪ ﺒﻪ ﺗﺭﺗﻴﺏ ﺗﺼﺎﺩﻔﻰ ﭙﺧﺶ ﺨﻮﺍﻫﻧﺩ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺍﺘﻔﺎﻘﻰ( )‬
‫‪Random -‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﺮدن از ﻋﻤﻜﺮد ﺑﺰرﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﻰ‬
‫اﺳﻔﺎده ازﻋﻤﻜﺮد ﺑﺰرﮔﻨﻤﺎﻴﻰ )‪(DVD/VCD‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺪﺮ ﺣﻴﻥ ﭙﺧﺵ‪ ،‬ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ‪ TOOLS‬ﺒﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻧﺗﺮﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺪﻭﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺮ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺪﻜﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻔﺷﺎﺭ ﺪﻫﻴﺪ�‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ †‪ π/‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍﻯ ﺍﻨﺗﺧﺎﺏ‬
‫‪ -‬ﺪﺮ ﺨﻼﻝ ﭙﺨﺶ ﺩﻯ ﻭﻯ ﺪﻯ ‪،‬ﺪﻜﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺑﺯﺭ ﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﻰ ﺑﻪ ﺘﺮﺗﻳﺏ ‪ /x۴/x٣/x٢/x۱‬ﻤﻌﻤﻭﻠﻰ ﻔﺸﺎﺭ ﺪﻫﻴﺪ�‬
‫ﺑﺭﺍﻯ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺷﺕ ﺑﻪ ﭙﺨﺶ ﻋﺎﺩﻯ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ REPEAT‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ‪ ) Repeat : Off‬ﺗﮑﺮار ‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮش( را ﻧﺸﺎن دﻫﺪ ‪..‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮي ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ‪MP3/WMA/JPEG/MPEG4/CD Audio‬‬
‫ﺪﻴﺴﻛﻬﺎﻯ ‪ MP3/WMA/JPEG/MPEG4‬ﺤﺎﻭﻯ ﺁﻫﻧﮔﻬﺎﻯ ﺘﻛﻰ ﻭ ‪ /‬ﻴﺎ ﺘﺼﺎﻭﻳﺭﻯ ﻫﺴﺘﻧﺪ ﻜﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺘﻭﺍﻥ ﺁﻧﺎﻥ ﺭﺍﺪﺭ ﭙﻭﺸﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺘﺮﺘﻴﺐ ﺯﻴﺭ ﻤﺭﺘﺏ ﻨﻤﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻴﻦ ﻤﻭﺍﺮﺪ ﻤﺷﺎﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻰ ﺍﺴﺖ ﻜﻪ ﺪﺭ‬
‫ﺮﺍﻴﺎﻨﻪ ﺑﺭﺍﻯ ﻘﺭﺍﺭﺩﺍﺩﻦ ﻔﺎﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺪﺭ ﭙﻭﺸﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻤﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺴﺘﻔﺎﺪﻩ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻧﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫\ ﻔﻴﻟﻢ ﻫﺎ‬
‫‪1/2‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاﯼ دﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ اﻳﻦ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ هﺎ و ﻓﺎﻳﻞ هﺎﯼ ﻣﻮﺟﻮد در ﺁﻧﻬﺎ‪ ،‬اﻳﻦ ﻣﺮاﺣﻞ را دﻧﺒﺎل ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺴﻴﻨﻰ ﺪﻳﺴک ﺭﺍﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﻧﻴﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﻳﺴک ﺭﺍﺭﻭﻯ ﺴﻳﻧﻰ ﻘﺭﺍﺭ ﺪﻫﻴﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺴﻴﻨﻰ ﺭﺍ ﺒﺑﻧﺩﻴﺩ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﻨﯽ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮد و ﻣﻨﻮﯼ ‪) Parent Folder‬ﭘﻮﺷﻪ اﺻﻠﯽ( ﻇﺎهﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮد )ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫روﯼ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﺎﻻ( ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ اﺻﻠﯽ ﺣﺎوﯼ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﯽ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮﯼ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎت ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻬﯽ دارﻧﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ و ﻏﻴﺮﻩ‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺑﺮاﯼ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﭘﻮﺷﻪ اﺻﻠﯽ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮد‪ ،‬دﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ ®‪ √/‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دهﻴﺪ و ﺳﭙﺲ ‪ ENTER‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ ‪ .‬ﻳﮏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻪ ﻧﺸﺎن دهﻨﺪﻩ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ‬
‫ﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ اﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻇﺎهﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮد‪ .‬ﭘﻮﺷﻪ هﺎﯼ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺣﺎوﯼ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﯽ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ هﺎﯼ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﺘﻮاﯼ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ )ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ و ﻏﻴﺮﻩ( ﮐﻪ در ﭘﻮﺷﻪ‬
‫اﺻﻠﯽ وﺟﻮد دارﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺒﺎﺰﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﺤﺮﻛﺖ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﺮدن ﭘﻮﺷﻪ‬
‫ﭙﻭﺷﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻔﻗﻂ ﻤﻰ ﺗﻭﺍﻦ ﺪﺮ ﺤﺎﻟﺕ ‪ stop‬ﺍﻧﺗﺨﺎﺏ ﻜﺮﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺑﺮاى ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ اﺻﻠﻰ‬‫ﺒﺭﺍﻯ ﺍﻨﺘﺧﺎﺒﻰ ﭙﻮﺷﻪ ﻣﺎﺪﺭ‪ ،‬ﺪﻜﻣﻪ ‪ RETURN‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺭﻓﺗﻦ ﺒﻪ ﭙﻮﺷﻪ ﻣﺎﺪﺮ ﻔﺷﺎﺭ ﺪﻫﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻴﺎ ﺩﻜﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ †‪ π/‬ﺭﺍﺑﺭﺍﻯ ﺍﻧﺘﺧﺎﺏ ”‪ “ . .‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ ENTER‬ﺮﺍ ﺒﺭﺍﻯ ﺭﻓﺗﻦ ﺒﻪ ﭙﻮﺷﻪ ﻤﺎﺪﺭ ﻔﺷﺎﺭ ﺪﻫﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺑﺮاى اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻧﻰ‬‫ﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺠﻬﺕ ﺍﻨﺗﺨﺎﺏ ﻤﻭﺭﺪ ﺪﻠﺨﻭﺍﻩ ‪،‬ﺩﻜﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ †‪ π/‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺴﭙﺲ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺑﺮاى اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻓﺮﻋۑ‬‫ﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻜﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ †‪ π/‬ﺭﺍﺑﺭﺍﻯ ﺍﻨﺗﺨﺎﺐ ﭙﻭﺷﻪ ﺪﻠﺨﻭﺍﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺴﭙﺲ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪CD-R MP3/WMA‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮔﺎﻣﻰ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎى ‪ MP3‬ﻳﺎ ‪ WMA‬رادر ‪ CD-R‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﻣﻮارد زﻳﺮ رادرﻧﻈﺮ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎى ‪ MP3‬ﻳﺎ ‪ WMA‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ‪ ISO 9660‬ﻳﺎ ‪ JOLIET‬ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬‫ﻓﺮﻤﺕ ‪ ISO 9660‬ﻮ ﻓﺎﻴﻠﻬﺎﻯ ‪ Joliet MP3‬ﻴﺎ ‪ WMA‬ﻴﺎ ‪ Microsoft DOS‬ﻴﺎ ‪ Windows‬ﻭ ‪ Apple Mac‬ﺴﺎﺰﮔﺎﺭ ﻣﻰ ﺒﺎﺷﻨﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻴﻦ ﻓﺮﻤﺕ ﻣﻌﻣﻭﻠﺗﺭﻴﻦ ﻓﺭﻤﺕ ﺍﺴﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺴﺩﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻧﺎﻣﮕﺬارى ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎى ‪ MP3‬ﻳﺎ ‪ WMA‬از ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ از ‪ ٨‬ﺣﺮف ﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ وﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ را ﺑﺼﻮرت ”‪ “MP3 .wma‬وارد ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬‫ﻓﺮﻤﺕ ﻨﺎﻢ ﻋﻣﻮﻤﻰ ‪ mp3.” :‬ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻦ” ﻴﺎ “‪ wma .‬ﻋﻨﻭﺍﻦ“‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮔﺎﻢ ﺴﺎﺧﺖ ﻋﻨﻭﺍﻦ ﺨﻭﺩ ﻤﻂﻣﺌﻦ ﺸﻭﻴﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ‪ ٨‬ﺣﺭﻑ ﻳﺎ ﻛﻤﺗﺮ ﺍﺴﺗﻓﺎﺪﻩ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﻴﺩ ﻔﺎﺼﻠﻪ‬
‫ﺨﺎﻟﻰ ﺪﺭ ﻧﺎﻢ ﻭﺠﻭﺩ ﻨﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺒﻜﺎﺭ ﮔﻴﺭﻯ ﺣﺭﻭﻒ ﻭﻴﮋﻩ ﺯﻴﺭ ﺨﻮﺩﺪﺍﺭﻯ ﻜﻨﻳﺩ ‪.(.,/,\,=,+) :‬‬
‫ ازﻳک ﻧﺮخ اﻧﺘﻔﺎل ﺑﺎز ﻛﺮدن ﻓﺸﺮدﮔﻰ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﺑﺮاﺑﺮ ﺑﺎ ‪ ١٢٨‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﺑﺎﻴﺖ در ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ درزﻣﺎن ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎى ‪ MP3‬اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬‫ﻜﻴﻓﻴﺕ ﺻﺩﺍ ﺪﺭ ﻔﺎﻠﻬﺎﻯ ‪ MP3‬ﺍﺴﺎﺳﺎﹰ ﺒﻪ ﻧﺮﺥ ﻓﺷﺮﺪﻩ ﺴﺎﺯﻯ ‪ /‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﺭﺩﻥ ﻓﺸﺮﺪﮔﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻨﺗﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻰ ﻜﻧﻴﺩ ﺑﺴﺗﮔﻰ ﺩﺍﺭﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺪﺴﺕ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﺼﺩﺍﻳﻰ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻜﻴﻓﻴﺕ ﺴﻰ ﺩﻯ ﺒﻪ ﻧﺮﺥ ﻨﻣﻭﻧﻪ ﮔﻴﺭﻯ ﺁﻧﺎﻟﻭگ ‪ /‬ﺩﻴﺟﻴﺗﺎﻞ ﻨﻴﺎﻞ ﻨﻴﺎﺯ ﺪﺍﺭﺪ‪ .‬ﻴﻌﻨﻰ ﺗﺑﺩﻴﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺕ ‪ MP3‬ﺒﻪ ﺤﺩﺍﻘﻞ ﻨﺭﺥ ﻨﻣﻮﻧﻪ ﮔﻴﺭﻯ ‪ ١٢٨‬ﻛﻴﻠﻭ ﺑﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺪﺮ ﺛﺎﻨﻴﻪ ﻮ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺛﺮ ‪ ١۶٠‬ﻜﻴﻟﻭ ﺑﻴﺖ ﺩﺮ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﻨﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﻜﺮﺩﻥ ﻨﺭﺧﻬﺎﻯ ﺑﺎﻻﺘﺭ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺩ ‪ ١٩٢‬ﻛﻴﻠﻭ ﺑﻴﺕ ﺪﺭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﻴﺎ ﺒﻴﺸﺗﺭ ﺑﻧﺪﺮﺕ ﻜﻴﻔﻴﺕ‬
‫ﺻﺩﺍﻯ ﺑﻬﺘﺭﻯ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻴﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺒﺭﻋﻛﺲ ﺍﻴﻦ ﺣﺎﻠﺖ ﻓﺎﻴﻠﻬﺎﻯ ﻜﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻯ ﻧﺮﺧﻬﺎﻯ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﺭﺩﻦ ﻔﺷﺮﺪﮔﻰ ﭙﺎ ﺌﻳﻨﺗﺮﺍﺯ ‪ ١٢٨‬ﻛﻴﻠﻭ ﺑﻴﺕ ﺪﺮ ﺛﺎﻨﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺩ‬
‫ﺒﻂﻭﺮ ﺻﺣﻴﺢ ﭙﺧﺶ ﻧﺨﻭﺍﻫﻧﺪ ﺸﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺮدن ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎى ‪ WMA‬ازﻧﺮخ اﻧﺘﻔﺎل ﺑﺎز ﻛﺮدن ﻓﺸﺮدﮔﻰ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﺑﺮاﺑﺮ ﺑﺎ ‪ ۶۴‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺑﻴﺖ درﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬‫ﻛﻴﻓﻴﺕ ﺼﺩﺍﻯ ﻔﺎﻴﻟﻬﺎﻯ ‪ WMA‬ﺍﺴﺎﺴﺎﹰ ﺒﺴﺗﮔﻰ ﺒﻪ ﻨﺮﺥ ﻓﺸﺮﺪﻩ ﺴﺎﺯﻯ‪ /‬ﺒﺎﺰ ﻛﺮﺪﻦ ﻓﺷﺭﺩﮔﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻨﺗﺧﺎﺐ ﻣﻰ ﻜﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺳﺘﮔﻰ ﺪﺍﺭﺪ‪ .‬ﺒﺩﺴﺖ ﺁﻭﺮﺩﻥ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺕ ﺼﺩﺍﻯ ﺴﻰ‬
‫ﺩﻯ ﺑﻪ ﻨﺮﺥ ﻨﻣﻭﻧﻪ ﮔﻴﺮﻯ ﺁﻨﺎﻠﻭگ ‪ /‬ﺩﻴﺠﻴﺗﺎﻞ ﺑﺴﺗﮔﻰ ﺪﺍﺮﺪ ‪ .‬ﻴﻌﻧﻰ ﺗﺑﺩﻴﻞ ﺒﻪ ﻔﺭﻣﺕ ‪ WMA‬ﺒﻪ ﺣﺩﺍﻗﻞ ﻨﺮﺥ ﻨﻣﻮﻨﻪ ﮔﻴﺮﻯ ‪ ۶۴‬ﻛﻴﻟﻭ ﺑﻴﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﻭ ﺣﺩﺍﻜﺛﺮ‪١٩٢‬‬
‫ﻜﻴﻠﻭ ﺑﻴﺕ ﺪﺭ ﺛﺎﻨﻴﻪ ﻨﻴﺎﺯ ﺩﺍﺭﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺭ ﻋﻛﺲ ﺍﻴﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﻔﺎﻴﻟﻬﺎﻯ ﻜﻪ ﺪﺍﺩﺍﻯ ﻨﺮﺨﻬﺎﻯ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻜﺮﺪﻦ ﻓﺷﺭﺩﮔﻰ ﭙﺎﺋﻴﻧﺗﺭ ﺍﺯ ‪ ۶۴‬ﻜﻳﻠﻮ ﺒﻴﺕ ﺪﺭ ﺛﺎﻨﻴﻪ ﻴﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺭ ﺍﺯ ‪ ١٩٢‬ﻜﻴﻠﻭ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺕ ﺪﺮ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻧﺩ ﺑﻂﻭﺭ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﭽﺧﺵ ﻧﺧﻭﺍﻫﻧﺩ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻨﺭﺥ ﻧﻤﻮﻨﻪ ﺒﺭﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻘﺎﺒﻝ ﭙﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻨﻲ ﺒﺭﺍﻱ ﻔﺎﻴﻝ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ WMA‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺴﺕ ﺍﺰ < ‪ ٣٠‬ﻜﻳﻠﻭ ﻫﺭﺘﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺳﻌﻰ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎى ﺣﻔﺎﻅﺖ ﺷﺪه در ﺑﺮاﺑﺮ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﺑﺮدارى ‪ MP3‬راﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬‫ﺑﺮﺧﻰ ﺍﺯ ﻔﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻯ “ﺣﻔﺎﻈﺕ ﺷﺩﻩ“ ﺑﺭﺍﻯ ﺠﻠﻭﮔﻴﺭﻯ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺴﺧﻪ ﺑﺭﺪﺍﺭﻯ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻨﻰ ﺮﻤﺯ ﮔﺫﺍﺮﻯ ﻮ ﺤﻓﺎﻅﺕ ﻛﺪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻴﻦ ﻔﺎﻴﻟﻬﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻨﻭﺍﻉ ﺯﻴﺮ ﻤﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺩ ‪:‬‬
‫‪TM‬‬
‫‪) MediaTM Windows‬ﻋﻼﻣﺕ ﺛﺑﺕ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺗﺟﺎﺮﻯ ﺷﺮﻜﺕ ‪ (Microsoft‬ﻮ ‪) SDMI‬ﻋﻼﻣﺕ ﺛﺑﺕ ﺸﺪﻩ ﺗﺠﺎﺮﻯ ﺒﻧﻴﺎﺩ ‪ (SDMI‬ﻨﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻴﻨﮔﻭﻧﻪ ﻔﺎﻴﻟﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻧﺴﺧﻪ ﺒﺭﺩﺍﺭﻯ ﻜﻧﻴﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻣﻬﻢ ‪:‬‬‫ﺘﻭﺻﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﻰ ﺗﻭﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻦ ﺗﺿﻣﻴﻨﻰ ﺪﺭ ﻣﻭﺮﺪ ﺍﻴﻨﻛﻪ ﺍﻴﻦ ﭙﺨﺶ ﻛﻨﻧﺩﻩ ﺩﻯ ﻭﻯ ﺩﻯ ﻔﺎﻴﻟﻬﺎﻯ ‪ MP3‬ﺭﺍ ﭙﺧﺶ ﺨﻭﺍﻫﺪ ﻛﺭﺪ ﺗﻠﻗﻰ ﻨﻤﻭﺪ ﻴﺎ ﺁﻨﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻌﻨﻭﺍﻦ‬
‫ﺗﺿﻤﻴﻨﻰ ﺒﺮﺍﻯ ﻛﻴﻓﻴﺕ ﺼﺪﺍﺪﺮ ﻨﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻔﺕ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻴﺪ ﺗﻮﺠﻪ ﺪﺍﺸﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺸﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺧﻰ ﺍﺯﻓﻦ ﺁﻭﺮﻴﻬﺎﻮ ﺮﻮﺷﻬﺎﻯ ﺿﺑﻃ ﻓﺎﻴﻞ ‪ MP3‬ﺭﻭﻯ ‪ CD-R‬ﻫﺎ ﺍﺰ ﭙﺧﺶ ﺒﻬﻴﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﻴﻟﻬﺎ ﺪﺭ ﭙﺧﺶ ﻜﻨﻧﺪﻩ ﺪﻯ ﻮﻯ ﺪﻯ ﺷﻣﺎ ﺠﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻯ ﻤﻰ ﻛﻧﺩ )ﺍﻓﺕ ﻜﻴﻓﻴﺕ ﺼﺪﺍﺩﺭ ﺑﺭﺧﻰ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺪ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﻮﺍﻨﺎﻴﻰ ﭽﺧﺶ ﻜﻨﻧﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺨﻮﺍﻨﺩﻥ ﺍﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﻴﻟﻬﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺍﻴﻦ ﺩﺴﺘﮔﺎﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺘﻮﺍﻧﺩ ﺗﺎ ‪ ۵٠٠‬ﻔﺎﻳﻞ ﻭ ‪ ۵٠٠‬ﭙﻮﺷﻪ ﺪﺭﻫﺮ ﺪﻴﺴک ﺭﺍ ﭙﺧﺶ ﻛﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‬
‫‬
‫‬
‫‬
‫‬
‫‬
‫‬
‫‬
‫ﭘﻴﺎم ﻫﺎي هﺸﺪاردﻫﻲ اﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻜﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ در ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎي‬
‫‪ DivX‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎن ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻋﺒﺎرﺗﻨﺪ از ‪:‬‬
‫‬
‫‪ .١‬اﺟﺎزﻩ ﻣﻮﺟﻮد ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻜﺪ ﺛﺒﺖ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ اﻳﺠﺎد ﺷﺪﻩ اﺷﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬‫‬
‫‪ Codec .٢‬ﺑﺪون ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎ اﻧﻮاع ‪ ، Codec‬ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﻫﺎي ﺧﺎص )ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ‬‫‪ AFS ،MP4‬و ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ‪ Codec‬ﻫﺎي اﺧﺘﺼﺎﺻﻲ( در اﻳﻦ‬
‫‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻜﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‬
‫‬
‫‪ .٣‬دﻗﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﺎﻗﺪ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ هﺎي ﺑﺎ دﻗﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ از ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻜﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬‫ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ‪MPEG4‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺰد ﭘﺨﺶ ‪MPEG4‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻴﻠﻬﺎﻱ ‪ AVI‬ﺒﺭﺍﻱ ﻨﮔﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺼﻭﺗﻲ ﻮ ﺗﺼﻭﻳﺮﻱ ﺒﻜﺎﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻧﺩ‪ .‬ﺗﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﺩ ﻓﺎﻴﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﺮﻣﺕ ‪ AVI‬ﻛﻪ ﭙﺴﻭﻨﺪ “ ‪ ”avi‬ﺩﺍﺮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﭙﺨﺶ ﻜﺭﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺴﻴﻧﻲ ﺪﻴﺴک ﺭﺍﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﻧﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻴﺴک ﺍﺒﺭ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺴﻴﻨﻲ ﺑﮔﺬﺍﺭﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺴﻴﻧﻲ ﺭﺍﺐﺒﻧﺪﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ®‪ √/‬ﺭﺍﺒﺭﺍﻯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻨﻮﯼ ‪) Videos‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ( ﻔﺸﺎﺮ ﺪﺍﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺴﭙﺲ ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺩ‪ .‬ﺪﻜﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ †‪π/‬‬
‫ﺠﻬﺕ ﺌﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﻓﺎﻴﻞ ‪ ،(DivX) avi‬ﺴﭙﺲ ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﺮار ﭘﺨﺶ ﻮ ﺍﺴﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻜﺭﺩﻦ ﺍﺰ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺭﺩ ‪AB Repeat‬‬
‫‪. .١‬ﺒﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻐﻳﻴﺮ ﺤﺎﻟﺕ ﭙﺧﺶ‪ ،‬ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ‪ REPEAT‬ﺭﺍﻓﺷﺎﺮ ﺪﻫﻴﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ †‪ π/‬ﺴﭙﺲ ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ‪ REPEAT‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﻭﺠﻭﺪ ﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ ﺨﺎﻤﻮﺵ )‪ ، (Off‬ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻦ )‪ ، (Title‬ﻔﻮﻟﺩﺮ )‪) (Folder‬ﻴک ﻓﺎﺼﻠﻪ ﺒﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻗﻃﻪ ﻣﺷﺧﺺ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺴﻂ ﻜﺎﺮﺑﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫ ﺨﺎﻤﻮﺵ )‪(Off‬‬‫ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻦ )‪ : (Title‬ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﭙﺧﺶ ﻤﻲ ﺸﻭﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻜﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻜﻧﺪ‪.‬‬‫ ﻔﻮﻟﺩﺮ )‪ : (Folder‬ﻔﺎﻴﻟﻬﺎﻱ ‪ AVI‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﻤﻲ ﻛﻧﺩ ﻜﻪ ﺪﺭ ﭙﻮﺷﻪ ﻓﻌﻟﻲ ﻣﺸﺎﺒﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪.‬‬‫ ﺘﮑﺭﺍﺭ ‪(REPEAT A-B) A-B‬‬‫ﭙﺧﺵ ‪A-B REPEAT‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺪﺮ ﺣﻴﻥ ﭙﺧﺵ‪ ،‬ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ‪ REPEAT A-B‬ﺒﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻧﺗﺮﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺪﻭﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺮ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺩﻜﻤﻪ ‪ REPEAT A-B‬ﺭﺍﺪﺭ ﻤﺤﻠﻰ ﻜﻪ ﻣﻰ ﺨﻭﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﭙﺧﺵ ﺘﻛﺮ ﺍﺭﻯ )‪ (A‬ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﺷﻭﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻔﺷﺎﺭ ﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺩﻜﻤﻪ ‪ REPEAT A-B‬ﺭﺍﺪﺭ ﻨﻘﻄﻪ ﺍﻯ ﻜﻪ ﻣﻰ ﺨﻭﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﭙﺧﺵ ﺘﻛﺮ ﺍﺭﻯ )‪ (B‬ﻣﺘﻭﻘﻒ ﺷﻭﺪ‪ ،‬ﻔﺷﺎﺭ ﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪,‬‬
‫ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﺎزﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻋﺎدﯼ‪ ،‬دﮐﻤﻪ ‪ REPEAT A-B‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دهﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ‪ ) Repeat : Off‬ﺗﮑﺮار ‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮش(‬‫را ﻧﺸﺎن دﻫﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻒ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد ‪MPEG4‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺼﻳﻑ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻟﻜﺭﺩ‬
‫ﺮﺪ ﺷﺪﻦ‬
‫)|‪ K‬ﻴﺎ ‪(|k‬‬
‫ﺪﺭ ﺤﻴﻥ ﭙﺧﺵ‪ ،‬ﺩﻜﻤﻪ |‪ K‬ﻴﺎ ‪ |k‬ﺭﺍﻔﺸﺎﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻌﺪﯼ ﻣﯽ رود‪.‬‬
‫ﺠﺴﺗﺠﻭ‬
‫)‪ K‬ﻴﺎ ‪(k‬‬
‫ﺪﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﭙﺧﺵ‪ ،‬ﺩﻜﻤﻪ ‪ K) SEARCH‬ﻴﺎ ‪ (k‬ﺭﺍﻔﺷﺎﺭ ﺪﺍﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺠﺴﺗﺠﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺴﺭﻋﺕ ﺑﻴﺷﺘﺭ ﺩﻭﺒﺎﺭﻩ ﻔﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺷﻣﺎ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻤﻲ ﺩﻫﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺴﺭﻋﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺭﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﻴﻞ ‪ AVI‬ﺠﺴﺗﺠﻭ ﻛﻨﻴﺩ‪(x٣٢،x١۶،x٨،x۴،x٢) .‬‬
‫ﭙﺧﺵ ﺤﺮﻜﺕ ﺁﻫﺴﺗﻪ‬
‫ﺯﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺪﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﭙﺧﺵ‪ ،‬ﺩﻜﻤﻪ )||®( ‪ ,PLAY‬ﺴﭙﺲ ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ‪ (K) SEARCH‬ﺑﻪ ﺸﻣﺎ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺪﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺎﺴﺭﻋﺕ‬
‫ﻛﻣﺘﺮﻱ ﺪﺮ ﻓﺎﻴﻞ ‪ AVI‬ﺠﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﻜﻧﻴﺪ‪(١۶/١،٨/١،۴/١،٢/١) .‬‬
‫‪/x۴/،x٣/،x٢/،x١‬ﻋﺎﺪﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻤﻣﻛﻦ ﺍﺴﺕ ﺒﺴﺘﻛﻲ ﺒﻪ ﻔﺎﻴﻝ ‪ MPEG4‬ﺍﻴﻦ ﻋﻤﻛﺭﺩﻫﺎ ﻜﺎﺭ ﻨﻛﻨﻧﺩ‪.‬‬‫ﻔﺎﻴﻝ ‪CD-R AVI‬‬
‫ﺍﻴﻦ ﺪﺴﺗﮔﺎﻩ ﻤﻲ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﺪ ﻔﺮﻣﺗﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﺷﺭﺩﮔﻲ ﻮﻴﺩﻮﺌﻲ ﺮﻴﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺭﻣﺕ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬
‫‪ AVI‬ﭙﺧﺶ ﻛﻨﺩ ‪:‬‬
‫ ﻣﺣﺗﻭﻴﺎﺕ ‪DivX 3 .11‬‬‫ ﻣﺣﺗﻭﻴﺎﺕ ‪) DivX4‬ﺑﺴﺗﮔﻲ ﺒﻪ ‪(MPEG4 Simple Profile‬‬‫ ﻣﺣﺗﻮﻴﺎﺕ ‪ MPEG4 Simple Profile) DivX5‬ﺑﺎﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺨﺎﺼﺗﻬﺎﻱ‬‫ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺑﻳﻞ ﻗﺎﺒﻬﺎﻱ ﺩﻭﻂﺮﻔﻪ‪ .‬ﻭ ‪ GMC‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﭙﺸﺗﻴﺑﺎﻨﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺸﻮﻧﺪ‪(.‬‬
‫ ﻣﺤﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺴﺎﺰﮔﺎﺮ ﺑﺎ ‪.MPEG4‬‬‫‪ DVD+R‬ﻭ ‪DVD-RW‬‬
‫‬
‫ﻔﺭﻤﺕ ﻘﺎﺒﻝ ﭙﺸﺘﻳﺒﺎﻨﻲ ﺒﺭﺍﻱ ﻔﺎﻴﻝ ‪: DivX‬‬
‫ ﻔﺭﻤﺕ ‪ DivX‬ﭙﺎﻴﻪ ‪DivX3.11 / 4.12/ 5.x‬‬‫ ‪DivX Pro‬‬‫ ﻔﺭﻤﺕ ﻔﺎﻴﻝ ‪.*.divx *.div *. avi :‬‬‫ﺍﻴﻥ ﺪﺴﺗﮔﺎﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻣﻪ ﻘﺪﺭﺕ ﺗﻔﻛﻴﻛﻬﺎ ﺗﺎ ﺤﺪﺍﻜﺛﺮ ﺯﻴﺭ ﭙﺸﺗﻴﺑﺎﻨﻲ ﻤﻲ ﻜﻨﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪DivX5‬‬
‫‪720 x 480 @30fps‬‬
‫‪720 x 576 @25fps‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺣﺩﺍﻛﺛﺭ ﺑﻴﺕ ﺭﻳﺕ ‪4Mbps :‬‬
‫‬
‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮ‬
‫• ﺩﻘﺕ ﺘﺻﻭﻴﺭﻱ ﻘﺎﺒﻝ ﭙﺷﺘﻳﺑﺎﻨﻲ ﺘﻭﺴﻁ ﻤﺩﻝ ‪DVD-E699‬‬
‫ﺘﺎ ‪ 25 @ 720 x 480‬ﻜﺎﺩﺭ ﻤﻲ ﺒﺎﺸﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻴﻥ ﺩﺴﺗﮔﺎﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪ CD-R/RW‬ﻨﻭﺸﺗﻪ ﺸﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ‪ MPEG4‬ﻤﻁﺎﺒﻖ ﺒﺎ‬
‫”ﻔﺭﻤﺕ ‪ “ISO9660‬ﭙﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻨﻲ ﻤﻲ ﻜﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎ ﻳﻠﻬﺎ ي رﺳﺎﻧﻪ اي ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎد از ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ‪) USB Host‬ﻣﻴﺰﺑﺎن ‪(USB‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻴﺘﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻜﺮدن ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ذﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎزي ﺑﻪ درﮔﺎﻩ ‪ USB‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﻜﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪ ،DVD‬از ﻓﺎ ﻳﻝ ﻫﺎي رﺳﺎﻧﻪ اي ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻋﻜﺴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ و ﻣﻮ‬
‫ﺳﻴﻘﻲ ذﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ در ﻴﻚ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻜﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪ ،MP3‬دورﺑﻴﻦ د ﻴﺠﻳﺘﺎل‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎ ﻜﻳﻓﻳﺕﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺻﺪا ﻟﺬت ﺑﺑﺭﻴﺩ‪.‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎدﻩ از ﻘﺎﺒﻟﻳﺕ ‪) USB HOST‬ﻤﻳﺯﺒﺎﻥ ‪(USB‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻮﺴﻳﻟﻪ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍﺒﻪ ﺩﺭﮔﺎﻩ ‪ USB‬ﻭﺍﻘﻊ ﺩﺭﺠﻟﻭﻱ ﺩﺴﺗﮔﺎﻩ ﻭﺼﻝ ﻜﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻨﻮﯼ ‪ USB‬ﻇﺎهﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮد‪ .‬ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ®‪ √/‬ﺭﺍﺒﺭﺍﻯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻨﻮﯼ ﻔﺸﺎﺮ ﺪﺍﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺴﭙﺲ ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺒﺭﺍﻱ ﺍﻨﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﻴﻙ ﻔﺎﻴﻝ ﺩﺭ ‪ USB‬ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ †‪ π/‬ﺭﺍ ﻔﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺒﺭﺍﻱ ﺒﺎﺯ ﻜﺭﺩﻥ ﻔﺎﻴﻝ ‪ ) ENTER‬ﺘﺎﻴﻳﺩ( ﺭﺍ ﻔﺷﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺠﺎﺒﺟﺎﻴﻰ ﺒﻳﻥ ‪ DVD‬ﻭ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺭ ﺪﻳﺳﻜﻰ ﺪﺭ ﭙﺧﺵ ﻜﻧﻧﺩﻩ ﺒﺎﺸﺩ ﻭ ﺪﺭ ﺤﺎﻝ ﻤﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﻴﺎ ﮔﻭﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺒﻪ ﻔﺎﻳﻝ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻴﮏ ﻭﺴﻳﻟﻪ ‪ USB‬ﺒﺎﺸﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻴﺎ ﻤﻧﻭﻯ‬
‫‪ USB‬ﺮﻭﻯ ﺼﻔﺣﻪ ﻘﺭﺍﺮ ﺪﺍﺸﺗﻪ ﺒﺎﺷﺩ ‪ ،‬ﻤﻰ ﺘﻭﺍﻨﻳﺩ ﺒﺎ ﻔﺷﺎﺭ ﺪﺍﺪﻥ ﺩﻛﻣﻪ ‪ DVD‬ﻜﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺮﺍﻩ ﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﺯ ﻮﺴﻳﻟﻪ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﺒﻪ ﺪﻴﺳﮏ ﺒﺭﻭﻴﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻣﭼﻧﻳﻥ ﻣﻰ ﺘﻭﺍﻨﻳﺩ ﺒﺎ ﻔﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺪﻜﻣﻪ ‪ USB‬ﻛﻨﺗﺭﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺮﺍﻩ ﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺪﻳﺳﮏ ﺒﻪ ﻭﺴﻳﻟﻪ ‪ USB‬ﺒﺭﻭﻴﺩ‪.‬‬
‫"‪) "USB LOADING ...‬ﺪﺭﺤﺎﻝ ﺒﺎﺭﮔﺫﺍﺭﻯ ‪ (USB‬ﺮﻭﻯ ﺼﻔﺣﻪ ﻨﻣﺎﻴﺎﻥ ﺸﺩﻩ ﻭﺴﭘﺱ ﻤﻧﻭﻯ ‪ USB‬ﻤﺷﺎ‬
‫ﻤﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﺨﻭﺍﻫﺩ ﺸﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮ‬
‫• ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ اﻧﺪازﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ و ﻣﺪت ﮐﻠﻴﭗ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎرﮔﺬارﯼ از ‪ USB‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ از اﺳﺘﻔﺎدﻩ از رﺳﺎﻧﻪ ‪ CD‬ﻳﺎ ‪ DVD‬ﻃﻮل ﺑﮑﺸﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮداﺷﺘﻦ ﺍﻳﻤﻦ ‪USB‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺑﺮاﯼ ﺑﺎزﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ دﻳﺴﮏ ﻳﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ اﺻﻠﯽ‪ ،‬دﮐﻤﻪ ‪ USB‬ﺮﺍ‬
‫‪ .٢‬دﻜﻤﻪ ‪) STOP‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ( )■( ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻜﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻜﻧﻴﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‬
‫‬
‫رد ﻜﺮدن ﺑﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ‪/‬ﻋﻘﺐ‬
‫در ﺣﻴﻦ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬دﻜﻤﻪ )|‪ (|k/K‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫• اﮔﺮﺒﻳﺵ ﺍﺯ ﻴﻙ ﻔﺎﻴﻝ ﻭﺠﻭﺩ ﺩﺍﺸﺗﻪ ﺒﺎﺸﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻲ ﻜﻪ ﺩﻜﻣﻪ )|‪ (K‬را ﻓﺸﺎر ﻤﻲ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ ﻔﺎﻴﻝ ﺒﻌﺩﻱ ﺍﻨﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﻤﻲ ﺸﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• اﮔﺮﺒﻳﺵ ﺍﺯ ﻴﻙ ﻔﺎﻴﻝ ﻭﺠﻭﺩ ﺩﺍﺸﺗﻪ ﺒﺎﺸﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻲ ﻜﻪ ﺩﻜﻣﻪ )‪ (|k‬را ﻓﺸﺎر ﻤﻲ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ ﻔﺎﻴﻝ ﻘﺑﻟﻱ ﺍﻨﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﻤﻲ ﺸﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﭙﺧﺵ ﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺒﺭﺍﻱ ﭘﺧﺵ ﺴﺭﻴﻊ ﺩﻴﺳﻙ‪ ،‬ﺩﻜﻣﻪ )‪ (k/K‬ﺭﺍﺩﺭ ﻃﻭﻝ ﭘﺧﺵ ﻔﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﺭﺒﺎﺭ ﻜﻪ ﻴﻛﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻴﻥ ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﺭﺍ ﻔﺷﺎﺭ ﻤﻲ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺴﺭ ﻋﺕ ﭘﺧﺵ ﺒﻪ ﺍﻴﻥ ﺘﺭ ﺘﻳﺏ ﻋﻭﺽ ﺧﻭﺍﻫﺩ ﺸﺩ ‪. ٣٢x o ١۶x o ٨x o ۴x o ٢x :‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺳﺎزﮔﺎر‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ‪ USB‬ﻜﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺴﺗﺎﻨﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺴﺎﺯﻱ ﺍﻨﺑﻭﻩ ‪ 1.0. USB‬ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻨﻲ ﻤﻲ ﻜﻧﻧﺩ )ﺘﺟﻬﻳﺯﺍﺕ ‪ USB‬ﻜﻪ ﺒﻌﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﻴﻙ ﺩﻴﺳﻙ ﺒﺭﺩﺍﺸﺘﻧﻲ ﺩﺭ‬
‫‪ 2000) Windows‬ﻴﺎ ﺠﺩﻴﺩﺘﺭ( ﺒﺩﻭﻥ ﻨﻳﺎﺯ ﺒﻪ ﻨﺻﺏ ﺩﺭﺍﻴﻭﺭ ﺍﻀﺎﻔﻲ ﻜﺎﺭ ﻤﻲ ﻜﻨﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﻜﻧﻧﺩﻩ ‪ : MP3‬ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ MP3‬ﺍﺯ ﻨﻭ ﻔﻟﺵ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺩﻭﺭﺒﻳﻥ ﺩﻴﺟﻳﺗﺎﻝ ‪ :‬ﺩﻭﺭﺒﻳﻥ ﻫﺎﺌﻲ ﻜﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺴﺗﺎﻨﺩاﺭﺩ ﺫﺨﻳﺭﻩ ﺴﺎﺯﻱ ﺍﻨﺑﻭﻩ ‪ USB‬ﺳﺧﻪ ‪ 1.0.‬ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻨﻲ ﻤﻲ ﻜﻧﻧﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﻭﺭﺒﻳﻥ ﻫﺎﺌﻲ ﻜﻪ ﺒﻌﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﻴﻙ ﺩﻴﺳﻙ ﺒﺭﺩﺍﺸﺗﻧﻲ ﺩﺭ ‪ 2000) Windows‬ﻴﺎ ﺠﺩﻴﺩﺘﺭ( ﺒﺩﻭﻥ ﻨﻳﺎﺯ ﺒﻪ ﻨﺻﺏ ﺩﺭﺍﻴﻭﺭ ﺍﻀﺎﻔﻲ ﻜﺎﺭ ﻤﻲ ﻜﻧﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۴‬ﻓﻠﺶ دراﻴﻭ ‪ : USB‬ﺘﺟﻬﻳﺯﺍﺘﻲ ﻜﻪ ﺍﺯ‪ USB2.0‬ﻴﺎ ‪ USB1.1‬ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻨﻲ ﻤﻲ ﻜﻧﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• اﮔﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ وﺳﻴﻠﻪ ‪ USB1.1‬وﺻﻞ ﺷﻮﻴﺩ ﻤﻣﻛﻦ ﺍﺴﺕ ﺘﻓﺎﻭﺕ ﻫﺎﺌﻲ ﺩﺭ‪ .‬ﻜﻳﻓﻳﺕ ﭘﺧﺶ ﺘﺟﺭﺒﻪ ﻜﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۵‬ﻜﺎرت ﺧﻮان ‪ : USB‬ﻜﺎرت ﺧﻮان ‪ USB‬ﺘﻛﻲ ﻭ ﻜﺎرت ﺧﻮان ‪ USB‬ﭼﻧﺩﺘﺎﺌﻲ ‪.‬‬
‫‬
‫• ﻜﺎرت ﺧﻮان ‪ USB‬ﻤﻣﻜﻥ ﺍﺴﺕ ﺒﺳﺗﻪ ﺒﻪ ﺴﺎﺯﻨﺩﻩ ﻤﻭﺭﺩ ﭘﺷﺘﻳﺑﺎﻨﻲ ﻘﺭﺍﺭ ﻨﮔﻳﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‬
‫• اﮔﺮ ﭼﻧﺩﻴﻥ ﺤﺎﻔﻅﻪ ﺭﺍﺒﻪ ﻴﻙ ﻜﺎﺭﺕ ﺨﻭﺍﻥ ﭼﻧﺩﺘﺎﺌﻲ ﻭﺼﻝ ﻜﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺸﺎﻴﺩ ﺒﺎ ﻤﺷﻛﻼﺘﻲ ﺭﻭﺒﺭﻭ ﺸﻭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‬
‫‪ .۶‬اﮔﺮ از ﻳﻚ ﺴﻳﻡ ﺭﺍﺒﻁ ‪ ،USB‬ﺍﻤﻛﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻮﺴﻳﻟﻪ ‪ USB‬ﺸﻧﺎﺨﺗﻪ ﻨﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮ‬
‫▪ ‪) CBI‬ﻜﻨﺘﺮل‪/‬ﻋﻤﺪﻩ‪/‬وﻗﻔﻪ( ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫▪ دورﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎي دﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎل ﻜﻪ از ﭘﺮوﺗﻜﻞ ‪ PTP‬اﺳﺘﻔﺎدﻩ و ﻳﺎ ﻧﻴﺎزﻣﻨﺪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﺮاي اﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﻪ ﻜﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫▪ دﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﺋﻲ ﻜﻪ از ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ NTFS‬اﺳﺘﻔﺎدﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻜﻨﻨﺪ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪) .‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪) 32/16 FAT‬ﺟﺪول ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪(32/16‬‬
‫ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد(‪.‬‬
‫▪ ﺑﺮﺧﻲ از ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﭘﺨﺶ ‪ MP3‬ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻲ ﻜﻪ ﺑﻪ اﻳﻦ دﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ وﺻﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺷﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ اﻧﺪازﻩ ﺳﻜﺘﻮر ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﻮد ﻧﺘﻮاﻧﻨﺪ ﻜﺎر ﻜﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫▪ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ‪) USB HOST‬ﻣﻴﺰﺑﺎن ‪ (USB‬در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﻜﻪ ﻣﺤﺼﻮل ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎي رﺳﺎﻧﻪ اي را ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﺨﺼﻮص ﺳﺎزﻧﺪﻩ در ﻣﻮﻗﻊ اﺗﺼﺎل ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﮔﻨﺪ‪،‬‬
‫‬
‫ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫▪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ‪) MTP‬ﭘﺮوﺗﻜﻞ ﺗﺒﺎدل رﺳﺎﻧﻪ( ﺑﺎ ‪ Janus‬ﻓﻌﺎل ﻜﺎر ﻧﻤﻲ ﻜﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫▪ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ‪) USB‬ﻣﻴﺰﺑﺎن ‪ (USB‬اﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺼﻮل از ﺗﻤﺎم دﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ هﺎي ‪ USB‬ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻧﻤﻲ ﻜﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫▪ ﻣﻴﺰﺑﺎن ‪ USB‬از دراﻳﻮﻫﺎﯼ دﻳﺴﮏ ﺳﺨﺖ ‪ (HDD) USB‬ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﺳﻲ دي‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ اﺟﺎزﻩ ﻣﻲ دهﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎي ﺻﻮﺗﻲ را از دﻳﺴﻚ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ‪ MP3‬روي ﻳﻚ وﺳﻴﻠﻪ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺮﻳﺰﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻨﻲ دﻳﺴﻚ را ﺑﺎز ﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻚ ﺳﻲ دي ﺻﻮﺗﻲ )‪ (CD DA‬در ﺳﻴﻨﻲ ﻗﺮار دادﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺁﻧﺮا ﺑﺒﻨﺪﻳﺪ‪ .‬وﺳﻴﻠﻪ ‪ USB‬را ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﺰﺑﺎن ‪USB‬‬
‫واﻗﻊ در ﺟﻠﻮي ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻜﻨﻨﺪﻩ وﺻﻞ ﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮای اﻧﺘﺨﺎب دﯾﺴﮏد ‪ DVD‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دھﯿﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫دﮐﻤﻪ ‪USB‬‬
‫‪ .١‬دﮐﻤﮫ ‪ TOOLS‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دھﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﮫ ﺗﮭﯿﮫ دﯾﺴﮏ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ داده ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬دﻜﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي †‪ ،π/‬ﺳﭙﺲ دﻜﻤﻪ ‪) ENTER‬ورود( را ﻓﺸﺎر دهﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ هﻤﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ را ﺑﺮاي ﻜﭙﻲ ﺷﺪن ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﮔﺬاري ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺑﺮاي ﻜﭙﻲ ﻜﺮدن هﻤﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺪون ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﮔﺬاري‪ ،‬دﻜﻤﻪ ‪) ENTER‬ورود( را ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎر دﻳﮕﺮ ﻓﺸﺎر دهﻴﺪ‪.‬‬‫‪ .٣‬دﻜﻤﻪ هﺎي √ ﻳﺎ † را ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪) START‬ﺷﺮوع( ﻓﺸﺎر دادﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ دﻜﻤﻪ ‪) ENTER‬ورود( را ﻓﺸﺎر دهﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻜﭙﻲ ﻜﺮدن ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺁﻏﺎز ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮﯼ ‪) Ripping‬ﮐﭙﯽ( ﺷﺎﻣﻞ دﮐﻤﻪ هﺎﯼ زﻳﺮ اﺳﺖ ‪:‬‬
‫ ﺤﺎﻟﺕ )ﺴﺮﻴﻊ‪/‬ﻋﺎﺩﻯ(‬‫ ‪ ) Bitrate‬ﻧﺮخ ﺑﯿﺖ(‪ ،‬ﺑﺮاي ﻋﻮض ﻛﺮدن ‪ ... 128kbps => 192kbps => 128kbps‬دﻛﻤﮫ ‪ ENTER‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دھﯿﺪ‪.‬‬‫ ‪) Device selection‬اﻧﺘﺨﺎب وﺳﯿﻠﮫ(‪ ،‬ﺑﺮاي ﻋﻮض ﻛﺮدن وﺳﯿﻠﮫ ‪ ENTER‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دھﯿﺪ )ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ‪.(4‬‬‫ ‪) Select – Unselect‬اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ‪ -‬ﻟﻐﻮ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب(‪ ،‬ﺑﺮاي ‪) Select all‬اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ھﻤﮫ( ﯾﺎ ‪) Select none‬اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ھﯿﭻ( ‪ ENTER‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دھﯿﺪ‪.‬‬‫ ‪) Start ripping‬ﺷﺮوع ﺗﮭﯿﮫ(؛ ﺑﺮاي ﺷﺮوع ﺗﮭﯿﮫ ﺳﻲ دي ‪ ENTER‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دھﯿﺪ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮ‬
‫• ﺑﺮاﯼ ﻟﻐﻮ ﮐﭙﯽ در ﺣﺎل اﻧﺠﺎم‪ ،‬دﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دهﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺎزﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﮫ ﺻﻔﺤﮫ ‪ ، CDDA‬دﻛﻤﮫ ‪ TOOLS‬را دوﺑﺎره ﻓﺸﺎر دھﯿﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫• هﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻜﻪ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﺳﻲ دي در ﺣﺎل اﺟﺮاﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﻜﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺧﻮاهﺪ ﺑﻮد‪.‬‬
‫• از آﻧﺠﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﮫ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ‪ ٢،۶‬ﺑﺮاﺑﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻋﺎدی اﺳﺖ‬
‫• ﻓﻘﻂ دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎي ﺻﻮﺗﻲ )‪ (CD CD‬را ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻜﺮد‪.‬‬
‫• هﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ در ﻣﻨﻮ ‪) Ripping‬ﮐﭙﯽ( هﺴﺘﻴﺪ‪ ،‬دﮐﻤﻪ ‪ USB‬ﻋﻤﻞ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮد ﮐﭙﯽ ﺳﯽ دﯼ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﺮاﯼ ﺑﻌﻀﯽ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﯼ ‪ MP3‬ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﺸﻮد‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﺳﻰدى ﻋﻜﺲ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﭙﻮﺷﻪ ﺪﻠﺧﻭﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻨﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺩﻛﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ †‪ π/‬ﺍﺭﺑﺭﺍﻯ ﺍﻨﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻔﺎﻴﻞ ﻋﻛﺲ ﺪﺭ ﻤﻨﻮﻯ ﻗﻂﻌﺎﺕ ﻔﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ‪،‬ﺴﭙﺲ ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍﻓﺸﺎﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮ‬
‫ ﺍﮔﺭ ﺪﻛﻤﻪ ﺍﻯ ﺑﺭﺍﻯ ‪ ١٠‬ﺛﺎﻨﻴﻪ ﺮﻭﻯ ﻛﻨﺗﺮﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺪﻭﺮ ﻔﺸﺎﺮ ﺪﺍﺪﻩ ﻧﺷﻮﺩ ‪،‬ﻤﻨﻮ ﻣﺣﻭ ﺧﻭﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺩ‪.‬‬‫‪ -‬ﺑﺭﺍﻯ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮔﺷﺕ ﺒﻪ ﻤﻧﻭﻯ ﻗﻁﻟﻌﺎﺕ ﺩﻛﻣﻪ ‪ STOP‬ﺭﺍ ﻔﺸﺎﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﭽﺭﺨﺶ‬
‫ ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ‪ TOOLS‬ﺭﺍﺒﺭﺍﻯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺮﺩﺍﻧﺩﻥ ﻔﺸﺎﺮ ﺪﺍﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺴﭙﺲ ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺩ‪.‬‬‫ هﺮ ﺑﺎر ﻜﻪ اﻳﻦ دﻜﻤﻪ ®‪ √/‬ﻓﺸﺎر دادﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪ 90‬درﺟﻪ در ﺟﻬﺖ ﺣﺮآﺖ ﻋﻘﺮﺑﻪ هﺎي ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻣﻲ ﭼﺮﺧﺪ‬‫ ھﺮ ﺑﺎر ﮐﮫ دﮐﻤﮫ ‪ π‬را ﻓﺸﺎر ﻣﯽ دھﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺑﺼﻮرت آﯾﻨﮫ ای ﻣﻌﮑﻮس ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮد‬‫ ھﺮ ﺑﺎر ﮐﮫ دﮐﻤﮫ † را ﻓﺸﺎر ﻣﯽ دھﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺑﺼﻮرت آﯾﻨﮫ ای ﭼﭗ و راﺳﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮد‬‫ﺑﺯﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﻲ‬
‫ ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ‪ TOOLS‬ﺭﺍﺒﺭﺍﻯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺒﺯﺮﮔﻧﻤﺎﻴﻰ ﻔﺸﺎﺮ ﺪﺍﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺴﭙﺲ ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺩ‪.‬‬‫ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺵ ﺍﺳﻼﻴﺩهﺮ ﺑﺎر ﻛﻪ دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﻓﺸﺎر دادﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺰرگ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪) Zoom‬ﺑﺰرﮔﻨﻤﺎﺋﻲ( ‪x۴/-x٣/،-x٢/-x١:‬‬‫ ﻤﻰ ﺘﻭﺍﻨﻳﺩ ﺒﺎ ﻔﺷﺎﺭ ﺪﺍﺩﻥ ﺪﻜﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ®‪ π/† √/‬ﺘﺻﻭﻴﺭ ﺒﺯﺭگ ﺸﺩﻩ ﺮﺍ ﺠﺎﺒﺟﺎ ﻜﺭﺪﻩ ﻭﻘﺳﻣﺕ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻤﺧﺗﻟﻑ ﺁﻨﺭﺍ ﻤﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﻜﻨﻳﺩ‪.‬‬‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ اﺳﻼﻳﺪ‬
‫ ﻫﺮﮔﺎﻩ ‪ play‬را روي ﻳﻚ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ Jpeg‬ﻓﺸﺎر ﻣﻲ دهﻴﻢ‪ ،‬دﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻤﺎس ﺻﻔﺤﻪ رﻓﺘﻪ و ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ اﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر‬‫ﺧﻮدﻜﺎر ﺷﺮوع ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮ‬
‫ ﺒﺴﺘﮔﻰ ﺒﻪ ﺍﻨﺩﺍﺰﻩ ﻔﺎﻴﻝ‪ ،‬ﻤﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺰﻤﺎﻨﻰ ﺒﻴﻦ ﻫﺭ ﺘﺼﻮﻴﺭ ﻣﻣﻜﻦ ﺍﺴﺖ ﺒﺎ ﻔﺎﺼﻠﻪ ﺰﻤﺎﻨﻰ ﺘﻨﻅﻴﻢﺸﺩﻩ ﻤﺘﻔﺎﻮﺕ ﺒﺎﺸﺩ‪.‬‬‫ ﺍﮔﺭ ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ﺍﻯ ﺭﺍ ﻔﺷﺎﺭ ﻨﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺴﻼﻴﺩ ﺒﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﭙﻳﺶ ﻔﺭﺾ ﺒﻌﺩ ﺍﺰ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ‪ ١٠‬ﺜﺎﻨﻳﻪ ﺒﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﺘﻮﻤﺎﺘﻴک ﺸﺭﻮ ﻉ ﻤﻰ ﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬‫دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎى ‪CD-R JPEG‬‬
‫ ﻔﻗﻁ ﻔﺎﻴﻟﻬﺎﻯ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻯ ﭙﺴﻮﻨﺪ ” ‪ “jpg.‬ﻭ ”‪ “JPG‬ﻣﻰ ﺗﻭﺍﻨﻧﺩ ﭙﺧﺶ ﮔﺭﺪﻨﺪ‪.‬‬‫ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻴﺴک ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻧﺸﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﭙﺧﺶ ﺑﻴﺸﺗﺭ ﻂﻮﻞ ﺧﻭﺍﻫﺩ ﻜﺸﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻤﻣﻜﻦ ﺍﺴﺏ ﺗﻣﺎﻣﻰ ﻔﺎﻴﻟﻬﺎﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺩﻩ ﭙﺧﺶ ﻧﺸﻭﻨﺩ‪.‬‬‫ ﻓﻗﻂ ﺩﻴﺴﻛﻬﺎﻯ ‪ CD-R‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻯ ﻔﺎﻴﻟﻬﺎﻯ ‪ JPEG‬ﺪﺭ ﻓﺭﻣﺕ ‪ ISO 9660‬ﻴﺎ ‪ Joliet‬ﻣﻰ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﭙﺨﺵ ﮔﺮﺪﻧﺪ‪.‬‬‫ ﻨﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ JPEG‬ﻧﻤﻰ ﺗﻭﺍﻨﺪ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺌﺯ ‪ ٨‬ﺤﺭﻑ ﺑﺎﺸﺪ ﻭ ﻨﺑﺎﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻮﻯ ﻓﺎﺼﻟﻪ ﺧﺎﻠﻰ ﻴﺎ ﺣﺮﻭﻒ ﻭﻴﮋﻩ ﺑﺎﺸﺩ )‪.(+ = / .‬‬‫ ﻓﻗﻁ ﻴک ﺪﻴﺴک ﭼﻨﺩ ﺠﻟﺴﻪ ﺍﻯ ﺗﺭﺗﻴﺑﻰ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﺩ ﭙﺧﺶ ﮔﺮﺫﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺭ ﺑﺧﺵ ﺧﺎﻠﻰ ﺪﺭﻴک ﺩﻴﺴک ﭽﻨﺪ ﺠﻟﺴﻪ ﺍﻯ ﻮﺟﻭﺪ ﺪﺍﺷﺗﻪ‬‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺩﻴﺴک ﺭﺍﻓﻗﻁ ﺗﺎ ﺒﺧﺶ ﺨﺎﻟﻰ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻭﺍﻦ ﭙﺧﺶ ﻛﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺤﺩﺍﻛﺛﺮ ﺘﺎ ‪ ۵٠٠‬ﺘﺼﻭﻳﺭ ﺭﺍﻣﻰ ﺗﻭﺍﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻴﺴک ﺗک ﺿﺑﻃ ﻧﻣﻭﺪ‪.‬‬‫ ﺴﻰ ﺩﻯ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻛﺩﺍک ﺗﻭﺼﻳﻪ ﻤﻰ ﺸﻭﻨﺩ‪.‬‬‫ ﻫﻨﮔﺎﻢ ﭙﺧﺵ ﺴﻰ ﺪﻯ ﺗﺼﻭﻴﺭ ﻛﺩﺍک‪ ،‬ﻓﻗﻁ ﻔﺎﻴﻟﻬﺎﻯ ‪ JPEG‬ﺪﺮ ﭙﻭﺸﻪ ﻋﻛﺴﻬﺎ ﺭﺍﻤﻰ ﺗﻬﺍﻦ ﭙﺧﺵ ﻛﺭﺩ‪.‬‬‫ ﺴﻰ ﺩﻯ ﻋﻛﺲ ﻛﺪﺍک ‪ :‬ﻔﺎﻴﻠﻬﺎﻯ ‪ JPEG‬ﺪﺭ ﭙﻮﺸﻪ ﻋﻛﺴﻬﺎ ﻤﻰ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﻁﻭﺭ ﺍﺗﻭﻣﺎﺗﻴک ﭙﺧﺶ ﺷﻮﻧﺩ‪.‬‬‫ ﺴﻰ ﺩﻯ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻛﻮﻧﻴﻛﺎ ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻰ ﺨﻭﺍﻫﻴ ﻋﻛﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺸﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻔﺎﻴﻟﻬﺎﻯ ‪ JPEG‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻭﻯ ﻗﻁﻌﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬‫ ﺴﻰ ﺪﻯ ﻋﻛﺲ ﻓﻮﺠﻰ ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺭﻣﻰ ﺧﻭﺍﻫﻴﺩ ﻋﻛﺲ ﺭﺍ ﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﻧﻴﺪ ‪،‬ﻓﺎﻴﻠﻬﺎﻯ ‪ JPEG‬ﺪﺭ ﻤﻨﻭﻯ ﻗﻁﻌﺎﺕ ﺮﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺩ‪.‬‬‫ ﺴﻰ ﺩﻯ ﻋﻛﺲ ‪ : QSS‬ﺩﺴﺘﮔﺎﻩ ﻧﻣﻰ ﺗﻭﺍﻨﺩ ﺩﻴﺴک ﻋﻛﺲ ‪ QSS‬ﺭﺍﭙﺨﺶ ﻛﻨﺩ‪.‬‬‫ ﺍﮔﺭ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﺎﻴﻟﻬﺎ ﺪﺭ ﺪﻴﺴک ‪ ١‬ﺑﻴﺵ ﺍﺯ ‪ ۵٠٠‬ﺒﺎﺷﺪ ‪ ،‬ﻗﻓﻂ ﻓﺎﻴﻠﻬﺎﻯ ‪ JPEG‬ﻤﻰ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﭙﺧﺶ ﺸﻮﻨﺪ‪.‬‬‫‪ -‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻌﺪﺍ ﭙﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺩﻴﺴک ‪ ١‬ﺑﻴﺷﺗﺭ ﺍﺰ‪ ۵٠٠‬ﺑﺎﺸﺪ ‪ ،‬ﻔﻘﻄ ﭙﻭﺷﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻔﺎﻴﻠﻬﺎﻯ ‪ JPEG‬ﻣﻰ ﺘﻮﺍﻧﻨﺩ ﭙﺧﺵ ﺸﻭﻨﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‬
‫‬
‫‬
‫ﺗﻐﺮ دادن ﻣﻨﻮى ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻣﻨﻮى ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻭﻯ ‪ Setup‬ﺒﻪ ﺸﻤﺎ ﺍﺠﺎﺯﻩﻣﻰ ﺪﻫﺪ ﺘﺎ ﭙﺨﺶ ﻜﻧﻨﺩﻩ ﺩﻯ ﻮﻯ ﺪﻯ ﺧﻭﺩ ﺮﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺐ ﺗﺮﺠﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﺧﺗﻑ ﺯﻧﺎﻦ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻅﻴﻢ ﺴﻂﺢ ﻮﺍﻟﺩﻴﻦ ﺤﺘﻰ ﺘﻧﻅﻴﻡ‬
‫ﭙﺧﺶ ﻛﻧﻨﺩﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺼﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻠﻭ ﻴﺯﻴﻮﻧﻰ ﻜﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻴﺪ ﺴﻓﺎﺭﺸﻰ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﻴﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻫﻨﮔﺎﻤﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺪﺴﺗﮔﺎﻩ ﺩﺮ ﺤﺎﻠﺕ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻣﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍﺩﺮ ﻛﻨﺗﺭﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺪﻮﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺮ ﺪﻫﻴﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ®‪ √/‬ﺭﺑﺭﺍﻯ ﺍﻨﺗﺧﺎﺏ‬
‫)‪ (Setting‬ﺘﻧﻅﻳﻤﻟﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺮ ﺩﺍﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺴﭙﺲ ﺩﻜﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺪﻫﻴﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ †‪ π/‬ﺭﺑﺭﺍﻯ ﺍﻨﺗﺧﺎﺏ ‪ Setup‬ﻓﺸﺎﺮ ﺩﺍﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺴﭙﺲ ﺩﻜﻤﻪ ® ﻴﺎ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺪﻫﻴﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ †‪ π/‬ﺭﺍﺒﺭﺍﻯ ﺩﺴﺗﺭﺴﻰ ﺒﻪ ﻭﻴﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎﻯ ﻤﺧﺘﻠﻑ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ® ﻴﺎ ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍﺒﺭﺍﻯ ﺪﺴﺘﺭﺴﻰ ﺒﻪ ﻭﻴﮋﮔﻴﻬﺍﻯ ﻓﺭﻋﻰ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۴‬ﺒﺭﺍﻯ ﻤﺤﻭ ﻛﺮﺩﻦ ﺻﻓﺤﻪ ﺗﻧﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻅﻴﻡ ﻛﺭﺩﻦ‪ ،‬ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ‪ RETURN‬ﺭﺍﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﺮدن ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎى ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎى ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻫﻨﮔﺎﻤﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺪﺴﺗﮔﺎﻩ ﺩﺮ ﺤﺎﻠﺕ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻣﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍﺩﺮ ﻛﻨﺗﺭﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺪﻮﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺮ ﺪﻫﻴﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ®‪ √/‬ﺭﺑﺭﺍﻯ ﺍﻨﺗﺧﺎﺏ‬
‫)‪ (Setting‬ﺘﻧﻅﻳﻤﻟﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺮ ﺩﺍﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺴﭙﺲ ﺩﻜﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺪﻫﻴﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ †‪ π/‬ﺭﺍﺒﺭﺍﻯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺴﻴﺴﺗﻡ )‪ (SYSTEM‬ﻔﺸﺎﺮ ﺪﺍﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺴﭙﺲ ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ® ﻴﺎ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ †‪ π/‬ﺭﺍﺒﺭﺍﻯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺯﺑﺎﻦ ﺪﻟﺧﻮﺍﻩ ﻔﺸﺎﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺩ‪ ،‬ﺴﭙﺲ ® ﻴﺎ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﺮدن وﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎى زﺑﺎن‬
‫ﺍﮔﺭ ﻤﻨﻭﻯ ﭙﺨﺶ ﻛﻧﻨﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﻤﻨﻭﻯ ﺪﻴﺴک‪ ،‬ﺼﺩﺍ ﻮ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺰﻴﺭ ﻧﻮﻴﺲ ﺮﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺑﻞ ﺗﻨﻄﻴﻢ ﻛﺭﺩﻩ ﺍﻴﺩ‪ ،‬ﺁﻨﻬﺎ ﻫﺭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻜﻪ ﺸﻤﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻫﻨﮔﺎﻤﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺪﺴﺗﮔﺎﻩ ﺩﺮ ﺤﺎﻠﺕ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻣﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍﺩﺮ ﻛﻨﺗﺭﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺪﻮﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺮ ﺪﻫﻴﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ®‪ √/‬ﺭﺑﺭﺍﻯ ﺍﻨﺗﺧﺎﺏ‬
‫)‪ (Setting‬ﺘﻧﻅﻳﻤﻟﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺮ ﺩﺍﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺴﭙﺲ ﺩﻜﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺪﻫﻴﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ †‪ π/‬ﺭﺍﺒﺭﺍﻯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺯﺑﺎﻦ )‪ (LANGUAGE‬ﻔﺸﺎﺮ ﺪﺍﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺴﭙﺲ ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ® ﻴﺎ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ †‪ π/‬ﺭﺍﺒﺭﺍﻯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺯﺑﺎﻦ ﺪﻟﺧﻮﺍﻩ ﻔﺸﺎﺮ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺴﭙﺲ ® ﻴﺎ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺯ ﻴﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻧﻤﺎﻴﺵ ﺸﻣﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﻰ ﺴﺎﺯﻧﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻋﻣﻟﻜﺭ ﺪﻫﺎﻯ ﻤﺧﺗﻟﻑ ﻭﻴﺪ ﺌﻭﻴﻰ ﭙﺧﺵ ﻜﻧﻧﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻅﻴﻢ ﻛﻧﻴﺩ‬
‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻫﻨﮔﺎﻤﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺪﺴﺗﮔﺎﻩ ﺩﺮ ﺤﺎﻠﺕ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻣﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍﺩﺮ ﻛﻨﺗﺭﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺪﻮﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺮ ﺪﻫﻴﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ®‪ √/‬ﺭﺑﺭﺍﻯ ﺍﻨﺗﺧﺎﺏ‬
‫)‪ (Setting‬ﺘﻧﻅﻳﻤﻟﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺮ ﺩﺍﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺴﭙﺲ ﺩﻜﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺪﻫﻴﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ †‪ π/‬ﺭﺍﺒﺭﺍﻯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻨﻤﺎﻴﺶ )‪ (DISPLAY‬ﻔﺸﺎﺮ ﺪﺍﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺴﭙﺲ ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ® ﻴﺎ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ †‪ π/‬ﺭﺍﺒﺭﺍﻯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺯﺑﺎﻦ ﺪﻟﺧﻮﺍﻩ ﻔﺸﺎﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺩ‪ ،‬ﺴﭙﺲ ® ﻴﺎ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺯﺑﺎﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﺧﺎﺐ ﻤﻯ ﺸﻭﺩ ﻭ ﺼﻓﺤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻧﻮﻯ ”ﺗﻨﻅﻴﻢ ﺯﺑﺎﻦ )‪ “(Language Setup‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﻰ ﮔﺭﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮ‬
‫ ﺒﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻱ ﻜﺎﺭﺒﺭ ﺘﻠﻭﻴﺰﻴﻭﻦ ﺭﺠﻭﻉ ﻜﻨﻳﺩ ﺘﺎ ﻤﻌﻠﻮﻢ ﺸﻮﺩ ﻜﻪ ﺁﻴﺎ ﺘﻠﻮﻴﺯﻴﻮﻨﺘﺎﻦ ﺍﺰ ﺍﺴﻛﻦ ﭙﻳﺶ ﺭﻭﻨﺩﻩ ﺤﻤﺎﻴﺕ ﻤﻲ ﻜﻧﺩ‪.‬‬‫ ﺍﮔﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺴﻜﻦ ﭙﻴﺶ ﺭﻭﻨﺩﻩ ﭙﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻨﻲ ﻤﻲ ﺸﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﻔﺗﺭﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻱ ﻜﺎﺭﺒﺭ ﺘﻠﻭﻴﺰﻴﻭﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻤﻮﺭﺩ ﺘﻨﻅﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﺴﻜﻦ ﭙﻴﺵ ﺮﻭﻨﺩﻩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺭ ﺨﺭﻭﺠﻲ ﻮ ﻴﺩﺌﻮ‬‫ﺒﻄﻮﺭ ﻨﺎﺼﺤﻳﺢ ﺘﻨﻅﻴﻢ ﺸﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﻤﻣﻜﻦ ﺍﺴﺕ ﺼﻔﺤﻪ ﻨﻤﺎﻴﺶ ﻤﺴﺩﻭﺩ ﺸﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺑﺭﺍﻱ ﺠﺭﻴﻳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﻔﺘﺭﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻱ ﻜﺎﺮﺑﺭ ﺘﻠﻮﻴﺯﻴﻭﻦﻭﻳﺎ ﭙﺭﻭﮋﻜﺘﻭﺭ ﺭﺠﻭﻉ ﻜﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮔﺎﻤﻴﻜﻪ ﻘﺩﺭﺕ ﺘﻔﻜﻴﻚ ﺩﺭ ﺤﻳﻦ ﭙﺨﺶ ﺘﻐﻴﻳﺭ ﻜﺭﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﻤﻣﻛﻦ‬‫ﺍﺴﺕ ﭽﻧﺩ ﺜﺎﻨﻳﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺸﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﺮدن ﻛﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎى ﺻﺪا‬
‫ﮔﺯ ﻴﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺻﺩﺍ ﺒﻪ ﺸﻣﺎ ﺍﺠﺎﺯﻩ ﻤﻰ ﺪﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺴﺗﮔﺎ ﻩ ﺼﻮﺗﻰ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻅﻴﻣﺎﺖ ﻮ ﺿﻌﻴﺕ ﺼﺩﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺘﻮﺠﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺴﻴﺴﺗﻡ ﺻﻭﺗﻰ ﻣﻭﺭﺩ ﺍﺴﺗﻓﺎﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻅﻴﻢ ﻛﻧﻴﺩ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻫﻨﮔﺎﻤﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺪﺴﺗﮔﺎﻩ ﺩﺮ ﺤﺎﻠﺕ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻣﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍﺩﺮ ﻛﻨﺗﺭﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺪﻮﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺮ ﺪﻫﻴﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ®‪ √/‬ﺭﺑﺭﺍﻯ ﺍﻨﺗﺧﺎﺏ‬
‫)‪ (Setting‬ﺘﻧﻅﻳﻤﻟﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺮ ﺩﺍﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺴﭙﺲ ﺩﻜﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺪﻫﻴﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ †‪ π/‬ﺭﺍﺒﺭﺍﻯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺻﺪﺍ )‪ (AUDIO‬ﻔﺸﺎﺮ ﺪﺍﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺴﭙﺲ ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ® ﻴﺎ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ †‪ π/‬ﺭﺍﺒﺭﺍﻯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺯﺑﺎﻦ ﺪﻟﺧﻮﺍﻩ ﻔﺸﺎﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺩ‪ ،‬ﺴﭙﺲ ® ﻴﺎ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮ‬
‫اﮔﺮ دﯾﺴﻜﻲ را ﺑﺎ ﺻﺪاي ‪ MPEG‬در اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺟﺮﯾﺎن ﺑﯿﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺴﺘﮫ ﺑﮫ ﮔﯿﺮﻧﺪه ‪ AV‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻮاﻛﺴﯿﺎل ﺻﺪا ﺧﺮوﺟﻲ ﻧﺪھﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺗﻰ ﻫﻨﮔﺎﻤﻰ ﻜﻪ ‪ PCM Down Sampling‬ﺭﻮﻯ ‪ Off‬ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‬
‫‪ -‬ﺑﺮﺨﻰ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻴﺴﻬﺎ ﻔﻗﻁ ﺼﺪﺍﻯ ﻧﻣﻮﻧﻪ ﮔﻴﻬﺎﺮﻯ ﺸﺩﻩﺪﺮ ﺴﻁﺢ ﭙﺎﺌﻴﻧﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻂﺭﻴﻖ ﺧﺮﻮﺠﻴﻬﺎﻯ ﺪﻴﺠﻴﺗﺎﻞ ﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﻤﻰ ﻜﻨﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺕ ﺍﻣﺗﻴﺎﺯ ‪ Dolby Laboratories‬ﺴﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺩﻩ ‪ .‬ﻋﻼﻤﺕ ﻫﺎﻱ ”‪ “Dolby‬ﻭ ‪ double-D‬ﻋﻼﺋﻡ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻯ ‪Laboratories Dolby‬‬
‫ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‬
‫ ﺒﺭﺍﻯ ﻤﺣﻮ ﻜﺮﺪﻦ ﻣﻧﻭﻯ ﺗﻧﻅﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺩ‪.‬‬‫ ﺍﮔﺭ ﺯﺒﺎﻦ ﻨﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺸﺩﻩ ﺭﻮﻯ ﺩﻴﺳک ﺿﺒﻄ ﻨﺸﺩﻩ ﺍﺴﺕ‪ ،‬ﺯﺒﺎﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻘﺒﻝ ﻀﺒﻄ ﺸﺩﻩ ﺍﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﻨﺘﺧﺎﺏ ﻤﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‬‫ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻤﻰ ﺨﻮﺍﻫﻳﺩ ﺰﺒﺎﻦ ﺘﺭﺍک ﺼﻮﺘﻰ ﭙﻴﺵ ﻔﺭﺽ ﺒﺎ ﺰﺒﺎﻦ ﺍﺼﻠﻰ ﻀﺒﻄ ﺸﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻴﺳک ﻴﻛﻰ ﺒﺎﺸﺩ‪” ،‬ﺍﺼﻠﻰ )‪ “(Original‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻨﺘﺧﺎﺏ ﻜﻨﻳﺩ‪.‬‬‫ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻤﻰ ﺨﻮﺍﻫﻳﺩ ﺰﺒﺎﻦ ﺰﻴﺭ ﻨﻮﻴﺱ ﺒﺎ ﺰﺒﺎﻦ ﺍﻨﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺸﺩﻩ ﺒﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻦ ﺰﺒﺎﻦ ﺼﺩﺍ ﻤﺸﺎﺒﻪ ﺒﺎﺸﺩ‪” ،‬ﺨﻮﺩﻜﺎﺭ )‪ “(Autiomatic‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻨﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻜﻨﻳﺩ‪.‬‬‫ ﺒﺭﺨﻰ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻴﺳﻛﻬﺎ ﻤﻣﻛﻦ ﺍﺴﺕ ﺤﺎﻮﻯ ﺰﺒﺎﻨﻰ ﻜﻪ ﺸﻤﺎ ﺒﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻦ ﺰﺒﺎﻦ ﺍﻮﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﻨﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻤﻰ ﻜﻨﻴﺩ ﻨﺒﺎﺸﻧﺩ؛ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻴﻦ ﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﻴﺴک ﺍﺯ ﺘﻨﻅﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﺼﻠﻰ ﺯﺒﺎﻦ ﺨﻮﺩ ﺍﺴﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺨﻭﺍﻫﺩ ﻜﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎى اﻣﻨﻴﺘﻰ‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻛﻨﺗﺭﻞ ﻮﺍﻟﺩﻳﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻯﻮﻯﺩﻯ ﻫﺎﻴﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﺎﻦ ﺪﺭﺠﻪ ﺒﻧﺩﻯ ﺗﺨﺻﻴﺹ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺴﺕ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻰ ﻜﻧﺩ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻣﺎ ﺪﺭ ﻛﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﺍﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﺩﻰ‬
‫ﻮﻯﺪﻯ ﻫﺎﻴﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺨﺎﻨﻭ ﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻣﺎ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﻤﻰ ﻛﻨﺩ‪ ،‬ﻜﻣک ﻣﻰ ﻜﻨﺩ‪ ٨ .‬ﻧﻭﻉ ﺴﻁﺢ ﺪﺭﺟﻪ ﺑﻧﺩﻯ ﺩﺭ ﻴک ﺪﻴﺴک ﻮﺠﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ردهﺑﻨﺪى ﺳﻨﻰ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻫﻨﮔﺎﻤﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺪﺴﺗﮔﺎﻩ ﺩﺮ ﺤﺎﻠﺕ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻣﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍﺩﺮ ﻛﻨﺗﺭﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺪﻮﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺮ ﺪﻫﻴﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ®‪ √/‬ﺭﺑﺭﺍﻯ ﺍﻨﺗﺧﺎﺏ‬
‫)‪ (Setting‬ﺘﻧﻅﻳﻤﻟﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺮ ﺩﺍﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺴﭙﺲ ﺩﻜﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺪﻫﻴﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ †‪ π/‬ﺭﺍﺒﺭﺍﻯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻤﻨﻴﺖ )‪ (SECURITY‬ﻔﺸﺎﺮ ﺪﺍﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺴﭙﺲ ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ® ﻴﺎ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺪﺭ ﻨﺧﺳﺗﻳﻥ ﺒﺎﺭﻯ ﻜﻪ ﺒﻪ ﻘﺳﻣﺕ ﻘﺎﺒﻠﻳﺕ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺍﻤﻨﻳﺗﺭﺴﻰ ﻤﻰ ﺒﺎﺒﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻴﺎﻳﺩ ﺮﻤﺯﻋﺑﻭﺭ ﭙﻳﺵ ﻔﺭﺹ ﺮﺍ ﻮﺍﺮﺩ ﻜﻨﻳﺩ‪ 0000. :‬ﺒﺭﺍﻯ ﻮﺍﺮﺩ ﻜﺭﺪﻥ ﺭ ﻤﺯ‬
‫ﻋﺑﻭﺭ ﭙﻳﺵ ﻔﺭﺽ‪ 0 ،‬ﺮﺍ ﺮﻮﻯ ﺼﻓﺣﻪ ﺒﺭﺠﺳﺗﻪ ﻜﺭﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺪﻜﻣﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺮﺍ ‪ 4‬ﺑﺎﺭ ﻔﺷﺎﺭ ﺪﻫﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺒﺭﺍﻯ ﺘﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺮﻤﺯ ﻋﺑﻭﺭ ﭙﻳﺵ ﻔﺭﺽ‪،‬‬
‫ﺒﻪ ‪) Change Password‬ﺘﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺮﻤﺯ ﻋﺑﻭﺭ( ﻤﺭﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻜﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۴‬ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ †‪ π/‬ﺭﺍﺒﺭﺍﻯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻮﺍﻟﺩﻴﻥ )‪ (PARENTAL‬ﻔﺸﺎﺮ ﺪﺍﺪﻩ ‪ ،‬ﺴﭙﺲ ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ® ﻴﺎ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۵‬ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ †‪ π/‬ﺭﺍﺒﺭﺍﻯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺴﻂﺢ ﺩﺭﺠﻪ ﺒﻧﺪﻯ ﻛﻪ ﻤﻰ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻔﺸﺎﺮ ﺪﺍﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺴﭙﺲ ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺭﭽﻪ ﺴﻃﺢ ﺪﺭﺠﻪ ﺒﻧﺩﻯ ﺒﺎﻻﺗﺭ ﺒﺎﺸﺩ‪ ،‬ﺒﺭﻨﺎﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻴﻰ ﻜﻪ ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭ ﻤﻧﺎﺴﺏ ﺒﺯﺭﮔﺳﺎﻻﻥ ﻫﺴﺗﻧﺩ ﻤﺟﺎﺯﺨﻭ ﺍﻫﻧﺩ ﺸﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺍﮔﺭ ﺳﻁﺢ )‪ (Kid Safe‬ﺍﻴﻤﻦ ﻛﻮﺩﻚ ﺮﺍ ﻨﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﻜﻨﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺪﻳﺳﮏ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺒﺎ ﺪﺭﺠﻪ ﺒﻧﺩﻯ ﺴﻃﺢ ‪ 2‬ﻴﺎ ﺒﺎﻻﺗﺭ ﭙﺧﺵ ﻨﺧﻭﺍﻫﻧﺩ ﺸﺩ ﻤﮕﺭ ﺁﻧﮑﻪ‬‫ﺮﻤﺯﻋﺑﻭﺭ ﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﺮﺩ ﻜﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮح اﻣﻨﻴﺘۑ‬
‫ ﺍﻴﻤﻦ ﻛﻮﺩﻚ‪.‬‬‫ ‪) G‬ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﻋﺎم( ‪ :‬ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲﮔﺮوﻩ هﺎي ﺳﻨﻲ‬‫ ‪) PG‬ﺑﺎ ﻧﻈﺎرت واﻟﺪﻳﻦ( ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺧﻲ از ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ هﺎ ﺷﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮاي آﻮدآﺎن ﺟﻮان ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬‫ ‪) PG-13‬هﺸﺪار ﺑﻪ واﻟﺪﻳﻦ( ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺧﻲ از ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺷﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮاي آﻮدآﺎن زﻳﺮ ‪ 13‬ﺳﺎل ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬‫ ‪) PGR‬ﺑﺎ ﻧﻈﺎرت واﻟﺪﻳﻦ( ‪ :‬اﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ هﺎ ﻟﺰوﻣﺎً ﺑﺮاي آﻮدآﺎن ﻧﺎﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬اﻣﺎ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﺑﻴﻨﻨﺪﮔﺎن ﺧﻮد ﻗﻀﺎوت آﻨﻨﺪ‪،‬‬‫و واﻟﺪﻳﻦ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ اﺳﺖ ﺑﻴﻨﻨﺪﮔﺎن آﻢ ﺳﻦ و ﺳﺎل را ﻧﻈﺎرت آﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪) R‬ﻣﻤﻨﻮع( ‪ :‬اﻓﺮاد زﻳﺮ ‪ 17‬ﺳﺎل ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﺘﻤﺎً هﻤﺮاﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺰرﮔﺘﺮ اﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ هﺎ را ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎ آﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬‫ ‪ : (NC-17) NC17‬ﻓﺮاد ‪ 17‬ﺳﺎﻟﻪ و ﺟﻮان ﺗﺮ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ اﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ هﺎ را ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎ آﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬‫ ﺒﺯﺮﮔﺴﺎﻝ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮ‬
‫‪ -‬ﺍﮔﺭ ﻜﻟﻣﻪ ﻋﺑﻮﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﺍﻣﻭﺶ ﻜﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻴﺩ ‪،‬ﺒﻪ ”ﻓﺮﺍﻤﻭﺶ ﻜﺭﺩﻦ ﻚﻠﻣﻪ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ“ ﺪﺭ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻯ ﻋﻴﺏ ﻴﺎﺒﻰ ﻤﺭﺍﺠﻌﻪ ﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ارﺗﻘﺎي ﺳﻔﺖ اﻓﺰار‬
‫ﻋﻴﺐ ﻳﺎﺑﻰ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺪﺮﺧﻭﺍﺴﺕ ﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ )ﻋﻴﺏ ﺒﺎﻴﺎﺑﻰ( ‪ ،‬ﻠﻂﻔﺎً ﻣﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻴﺭ ﺭﺍﺑﺭﺭﺴﻰ ﻛﻨﻴﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺼﻓﺣﻪ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺴﺕ‬
‫ﻔﺭﺍﻤﻮﺵ ﻜﺭﺩﻦ ﻜﻠﻤﻪ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫اﻗﺪام‬
‫‬
‫▪ ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ||® ﺪﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﻛﻪ ﺪﻴﺴﻛﻰ ﺪﺭ ﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻧﺑﺎﺸﺩ ﺭﺍﺑﺭﺍﻯ ﺒﻴﺸﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ‪ ۵‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺮ ﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻣﺎﻣﻰ ﺗﻧﻅﻴﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻴﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﺮﺧﺎﻨﻪ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺕ ﻣﻰ ﻜﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫▪ ﺩﻛﻣﻪ ||® ﺪﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﻛﻪ ﺪﻳﺴﻜﻰ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻧﺑﺎﺸﺪ ﺭﺍﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺑﻴﺸﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ ۵‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﻔﺸﺎﺭ ﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺘﻣﺎﻣﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻴﻣﺎﺕ ﻭ ﻫﻣﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻛﻠﻣﻪ ﻋﺒﻮﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻆﻴﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﺭﺨﺎﻨﻪ ﺒﺮﮔﺸﺕ ﺧﻭﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﻨﻣﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻴﻦ ﺤﺎﻟﺕ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﺴﺗﻓﺎﺪﻩ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﮔﺮ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﺎً ﺑﺩﺍﻥ ﻨﻴﺎﺯ ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺸﻴﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ دادن ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻋﺒﻮر‬
‫ﺒﺭﺍﻯ ﻋﻭﺽ ﻜﺭﺪﻥ ﺮﻤﺯﻋﺑﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻤﺭﺍﺤﻝ ﺰﻴﺭ ﺮﺍ ﺍﻨﺠﺎﻡ ﺪﻫﻳﺩ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﮔﺯﻴﻧﻪ ﺍﻤﻨﻴﺖ )‪ (SECURITY‬ﺮﺍﺪﺭ ﻤﻧﻭﻯ ﺘﻧﻆﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻨﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﻜﺭﺪﻩﻭ ﺴﭙﺲ ﺩﻜﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺪﻫﻴﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺮﻤﺯ ﻋﺑﻭﺭ ‪ 4‬ﺮﻘﻣﻰ ﻜﻧﻭﻨﻰ ﺮﺍ ﻮﺍﺮﺩ ﻜﻨﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺯﻫﺭﮔﺯ ﻘﺑﻼً ﺮﻤﺯ ﻋﺒﻭﺭ ﺮﺍ ﻋﻭﺽ ﻨﮑﺭﺪﻩ ﺍﻴﺩ‪ ،‬ﺮﻤﺯﻋﺑﻭﺭ ﭙﻳﺵ ﻔﺭﺹ ﺮﺍ ﻮﺍﺮﺩ ﻜﻨﻳﺩ‪.0000. :‬‬
‫ﺒﺭﺍﻯ ﻭﺍﺭﺪ ﻜﺭﺪﻥ ﻴﮏ ﻋﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺪﻜﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ®‪ π/† √/‬ﺒﺭﺍﻯ ﺒﺭﺠﺳﺗﻪ ﻜﺭﺪﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﺴﺗﻔﺎﺪﻩ ﻜﺭﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺴﭘﺱ ﺪﻜﻣﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺮﺍ ﻔﺷﺎﺭ ﺪﻫﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺘﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺮﻤﺯ ﻋﺑﻭﺭ )‪ (CHANGE PASSWORD‬ﺮﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﻛﺭﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺴﭘﺱ ﺪﻛﻣﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺪﻫﻴﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۴‬ﺮﻤﺯ ﻋﺑﻭﺭ ‪ 4‬ﺮﻘﻣﻰ ﺠﺩﻴﺪ ﺮﺍ ﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻜﻨﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺪﻜﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ®‪ π/† √/‬ﺒﺭﺍﻯ ﺍﻨﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﻴﮏ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﺴﺗﻓﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺭﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺴﭘﺱ ﺪﻛﻣﻪ ‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺮﺍ ﻔﺷﺎﺭ ﺪﻫﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻴﻥ ﻜﺎﺭ ﺮﺍ ‪ 4‬ﺒﺎﺭ ﺘﮑﺭﺍﺮ ﻜﻨﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۵‬ﺒﺭﺍﻯ ﺘﺎﻳﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺴﻡ ﺮﻤﺯ ﺠﺩﻴﺩ ﺮﺍ ﺒﻪ ﻫﻣﺘﻥ ﺘﺭﺘﻳﺏ ﺪﻭﺒﺎﺭﻩ ﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﻤﻧﻭﻯ ﻗﺎﺒﻟﻳﺕ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺍﻤﻧﻳﺗﻰ ﺪﻭﺒﺎﺭﻩ ﻨﻣﺎﻴﺎﻥ ﻤﻰ ﺸﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎى ﻋﻤﻮﻣى‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻫﻨﮔﺎﻤﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺪﺴﺗﮔﺎﻩ ﺩﺮ ﺤﺎﻠﺕ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻣﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍﺩﺮ ﻛﻨﺗﺭﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺪﻮﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺮ ﺪﻫﻴﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ®‪ √/‬ﺭﺑﺭﺍﻯ ﺍﻨﺗﺧﺎﺏ‬
‫)‪ (Setting‬ﺘﻧﻅﻳﻤﻟﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺮ ﺩﺍﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺴﭙﺲ ﺩﻜﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺪﻫﻴﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ †‪ π/‬ﺭﺍﺒﺭﺍﻯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻋﻤﻮﻤﻰ ﻔﺸﺎﺮ ﺪﺍﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺴﭙﺲ ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ® ﻴﺎ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ †‪ π/‬ﺭﺍﺒﺭﺍﻯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺯﺑﺎﻦ ﺪﻟﺧﻮﺍﻩ ﻔﺸﺎﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺩ‪ ،‬ﺴﭙﺲ ® ﻴﺎ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎى ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧى‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ اﻣﮑﺎن ﻣﯽ دهﺪ ﺗﺎ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪ DVD‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﮐﺪ ﻣﺪل‪ ،‬ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﻧﺮم اﻓﺰار‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎرﻩ ﺳﺮﻳﺎل و ﻧﺴﺨﻪ‬
‫را ﮐﻪ در ﭘﺸﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪ DVD‬ﻧﻴﺰ دﻳﺪ ﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮد‪ ،‬ﺑﺮرﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻫﻨﮔﺎﻤﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺪﺴﺗﮔﺎﻩ ﺩﺮ ﺤﺎﻠﺕ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻣﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍﺩﺮ ﻛﻨﺗﺭﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺪﻮﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺮ ﺪﻫﻴﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ®‪ √/‬ﺭﺑﺭﺍﻯ ﺍﻨﺗﺧﺎﺏ‬
‫)‪ (Setting‬ﺘﻧﻅﻳﻤﻟﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺮ ﺩﺍﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺴﭙﺲ ﺩﻜﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺪﻫﻴﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ †‪ π/‬ﺭﺍﺒﺭﺍﻯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﭘﺷﺗﻴﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻔﺸﺎﺮ ﺪﺍﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺴﭙﺲ ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ® ﻴﺎ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺭﺍﺒﺭﺍﻯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻄﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻤﺤﺻﻮﻝ ﻔﺸﺎﺮ ﺪﺍﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺴﭙﺲ ﺩﻜﻣﻪ ® ﻴﺎ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت‬
‫ﻨﻳﺎﺯﻫﺎﻯ ﻘﺩ ﺭﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﺒﺮﻖ‬
‫ﻋﻣﻭ ﻣﻰ‬
‫ﻭﺯﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺪ‬
‫‪) ٣۰٠ mm‬ﻋﺭﺾ( ‪) ٢٠۸ mm X‬ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ( ‪) ۴٢ mm X‬ﻁﻮ ﻞ(‬
‫ﻣﺣﺪﻭﺪﻩ ﺭ ﻄﻮ ﺑﺕ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺗﻰ‬
‫ﺠﺭ ﻭ ﺟﻰ ﺻﺩﺍ‬
‫‬
‫ﺑﺮاي ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻧﻴﺮو و ﻣﺼﺮف ﺑﺮﻕ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺒﻲ ﻜﻪ ﺑﺮ روي‬
‫ﺣﺼﻮل اﻟﺼﺎق ﺷﺪﻩ رﺟﻮع ﺷﻮد‬
‫‪ ١،۱۰‬ﻜﻴﻠﻭ ﮔﺮ ﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺣﺪﻭﺪﻩ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺕ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺗﻰ‬
‫ﺧﺭﻭ ﺟﻰ ﺗﺻﻭ ﻳﺭ‬
‫‪) AC‬ﻣﺗﻨﺎﻭﺐ( ‪١١٠‬ـ‪ ٢۴٠‬ﻭﻟﺕ‪ ۶٠/۵٠ ،‬ﻫﺭﺗﺯ‬
‫‪ +۵‬ﺗﺎ‪+٣۵‬ﺠﻪ ﺴﺎﻨﺘﻰ ﮔﺭﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٪١٠‬ﺗﺎ ‪٪٧۵‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺩﺋﻭﻯ ﻣﺭﻜﺐ‬
‫‪١‬ﻜﺎﻧﺎﻞ ‪ ١،٠ :‬ﻭﻠﺖ ﭘﻳڪ ﺘﻭ ﭘﻳک )‪ ٧۵‬ﺍﻫﻢ ﺑﺎﺮ(‬
‫ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮ ﻛﺎﻣﭘﻭﻧﻧﺖ‬
‫‪ ١،٠ : Y‬ﻭﻠﺖ ﭘﻳڪ ﺘﻮ ﭙﻴڪ )‪ ٧۵‬ﺍﻫﻢ ﺒﺎﺮ(‬
‫‪ ٠،٧٠: Pr‬ﻭﻠﺖ ﭘﻳڪ ﺘﻮ ﭙﻴڪ )‪ ٧۵‬ﺍﻫﻢ ﺒﺎﺮ(‬
‫‪ ٠،٧٠: Pb‬ﻭﻠﺖ ﭘﻳڪ ﺘﻮ ﭙﻴڪ )‪ ٧۵‬ﺍﻫﻢ ﺒﺎﺮ(‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺧﺮوﺟﯽ‬
‫‪CH ٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪاﮐﺜﺮ ﻣﻴﺰان ﺧﺮوﺟﯽ‬
‫‪Vrms ٢‬‬
‫ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﻔﺭﻛﺎﻨﺲ‬
‫‪ ٢٠‬ﻫﺭﺘﺯ ‪ ٢٠ -‬ﻜﺘﻠﻭ ﻫﺭﺘﺯ‬
‫ﺧﺮوﺟﯽ ﺻﺪاﯼ دﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎل‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﮐﻮاﮐﺴﻴﺎل )‪(S/PDIF‬‬
‫ﺎدداﺷﺖ‬
‫‬
‫ﺎدداﺷﺖ‬
‫ﺎدداﺷﺖ‬
‫ ﺘﻣﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻳﺭﻴﺩ‬SAMSUNG WORLD WIDE ‫ﺒﺎ‬
.‫ ﺘﻣﺎﺱ ﺒﮕﻳﺭﻴﺩ‬SAMSUNG ‫ ﻠﻃﻓﺎً ﺒﺎ ﻤﺭﮐﺯﺨﺩﻤﺎﺕ ﻤﺷﺗﺭﻯ‬.‫ ﺪﺍﺭﻴﺩ‬Samsung ‫ﺪﺭﺼﻭﺭﺘﻳﮑﻪ ﻫﺭﮔﻭﻨﻪ ﭙﺭﺴﺵ ﻴﺎ ﻨﻂﺭﻯ ﺪﺭﻤﻭﺭﺩ ﻤﺣﺻﻭﻻﺕ‬
Area
` Asia Pacific
AUSTRALIA
NEW ZEALAND
CHINA
HONG KONG
INDIA
INDONESIA
MALAYSIA
PHILIPPINES
SINGAPORE
THAILAND
TAIWAN
VIETNAM
Contact Centre 
1300 362 603
0800 SAMSUNG (0800 726 786)
400-810-5858
(852) 3698 4698
1800 1100 11
3030 8282
1800 3000 8282
1800 266 8282
0800-112-8888
021-5699-7777
1800-88-9999
1-800-10-SAMSUNG(726-7864) for PLDT
1-800-3-SAMSUNG(726-7864) for Digitel
1-800-8-SAMSUNG(726-7864) for Globe
02-5805777
1800-SAMSUNG(726-7864)
1800-29-3232
02-689-3232
0800-329-999
0266-026-066
1 800 588 889
Web Site
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com/hk
www.samsung.com/hk_en/
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
Area
` Middle East
U.A.E
OMAN
KUWAIT
BAHRAIN
Egypt
JORDAN
IRAN
Morocco
Saudi Arabia
` Africa
NIGERIA
Ghana
Cote D’ Ivoire
Senegal
Cameroon
KENYA
UGANDA
TANZANIA
SOUTH AFRICA
Contact Centre 
Web Site
800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
183-2255
8000-4726
08000-726786
800-22273
021-8255
080 100 2255
9200-21230
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
0800-726-7864
0800-10077
0302-200077
8000 0077
800-00-0077
7095- 0077
0800 724 000
0800 300 300
0685 88 99 00
0860-SAMSUNG(726-7864 )
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com